Home

Baja Marine 242 Boat User Manual

image

Contents

1. See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 42 000 Miles 70 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 16 Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote For Two Wheel Drive vehicles only Clean and repack the front wheel bearings or at each brake relining whichever occurs first Change automatic
2. 61 2 inches 155 4 cm Rear Tread 22W D esena Er EE ST 54 7 inches 138 8 cm 4WD 15 inch Tires 55 1 inches 139 9 cm 31x 10 5 Tires 59 1 inches 150 0 cm Figures reflect base equipment only 6 73 Section 7 Maintenance Schedule This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety dependability and emission control performance 7 2 Introduction 7 43 7 4 Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services 7 48 7 6 Scheduled Maintenance 7 50 7 8 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 7 53 7 30 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance Part B Owner Checks and Services Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Part E Maintenance Record IMPORTANT KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS RECOMMENDED Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details 7 2 Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance procedures are important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your v
3. The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 17 Q What s wrong with this CY 3 Z Oe X in Dand De py al The belt is twisted across the body 1 18 You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don t wear safety belts To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it s more likely that the fetus won t be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position earlier in this section The right front
4. When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 7 23 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 78 000 Miles 130 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 81 000 Miles 135 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 7 24 Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis componen
5. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking in Emergencies earlier in this section It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available 4 10 An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you re driving OFF ROAD RECOVERY LEFT APPROX QUARTER TURN edge of paved surface If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing The driver
6. vii You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Don t Don t do this or Don t let this happen Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this book you will find these notices NOTICE These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle Viii In the notice area we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words You ll also see warning labels on your vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE Vehicle Symbols These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle Also see Warning Lights and Gages in the Index For example these symbols are used on an original battery 9 CAUTION POSSIBLE INJURY PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING CAUSTIC BURNS AVOID SPARKS OR FLAMES BATTERY ACID COULD w CAUSE SPARKOR ili FLAME EXPLODE BATTERY These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven one YY CHILD e B RESTRAINT ay TOP STRAP Ahi ANCHOR DOOR LOCK UNLOCK FASTEN SEAT BELTS POWER WINDOW A AIR BAG A These symbols have to do with your lamps MASTER SE
7. Loading Your Vehicle in the Index Add On Equipment When you carry removable items you may need to put a limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment NOTICE Your warranty doesn t cover parts or components that fail because of overloading Truck Camper Loading Information The Truck Camper Loading label is located on the passenger s door near the latch It will tell you if your vehicle can carry a slide in camper how much of a load your vehicle can carry and how to correctly spread out your load Also it will help you match the right slide in camper to your vehicle When the truck is used to carry a slide in camper the total cargo load of the truck consists of the manufacturer s camper weight figure the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer s camper weight figure the weight of camper cargo and the weight of passengers in the camper The total cargo load should not exceed the truck s cargo weight rating and the camper s center of gravity should fall within the truck s recommended center of gravity zone when installed The Cargo Weight Rating CWR is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry It doesn t include the weight of the people inside But you can figure about 150 Ibs 68 kg for each seating position The total cargo load must not be more than your
8. Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can t do There are some hills that simply can t be driven no matter how well built the vehicle Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you can t control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness don t drive the hill Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill you need to decide if it s one of those hills that s just too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top 4 18 On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill Is there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won t have to make turning maneuvers Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your pa
9. SONOTIFR 2001 Sonoma under warranty is backed with the following services Courtesy Transportation C Trip Routing F Gmk EE BEEF aBer iG aSo re NM WA Sro F _ 1 800 GMC 8 782 For vehicles purchased in Canada call 1 800 268 6800 that provides in an emergency Free lockout assistance Free dead battery assistance Free out of fuel assistance Free flat tire change Emergency towing 2001 GMC Sonoma Owner s Manual Litho in U S Copyright General Motors Corporation 2000 iar First Edition All Rights Reserved ii o o o o Seats and Seat Controls Safety Belts Windows Keys and Door Locks Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped Tailgate Automatic Transmission If Equipped Table of Contents Seats and Restraint Systems AirBag Systems Restraint Systems for Children Features and Controls Turn Signal M ultifunction Lever Windshield Wipers Cruise Control If Equipped Exterior and Interior Lamps Mirrors Manual Transmission Operation If Equipped Storage Compartments Four Wheel Drive If Equipped Parking Brake Tilt Wheel If Equipped Accessory Power Outlets OnStar System If Equipped Instrument Panel Warning Lights and Gages Table of Contents cont d Comfort Controls and Audio Systems Heating and Air Conditioning Radio Cassette Player CD Player Setting the Radio Clock Radio Theft Deterrent Feature If Equi
10. See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher 7 38 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km C Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 82 500 Miles 137 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service MILEAGE s Lubricate chassis components or every 12 m
11. See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote For Two Wheel Drive vehicles only Clean and repack the front wheel bearings or at each brake relining whichever occurs first Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote 7 26 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 93 000 Miles 155 000 km a ooo Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant v
12. and ask for instructions 8 8 If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GMC helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs reimbursement up to 30 per day five days maximum may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus In addition should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to 10 per day five day maximum may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts Courtesy Rental Vehicle When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained at actual cost up to a maximum
13. in the Index Don t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish NOTICE Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon
14. type chains that are the proper size for your tires Install them on the drive axle tires four wheel drive vehicles can use chains on both axles and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten them If the contact continues slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle Appearance Care Remember cleaning products can be hazardous Some are toxic Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle be sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings and instructions And always open your doors or windows when you re cleaning the inside Never use these to clean your vehicle Gasoline Benzene Naphtha Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Paint Thinner Turpentine Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous some more than others and they can all damage your vehicle too Don t use any of these unless this manual says you can In many uses these will damage your vehicle e Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach e Reducing Agents Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
15. 2 Category LB or GC LB Chassis Lubricant GM Part No 12377985 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB 7 51 USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Clutch Pushrod to Clutch Fork Joint Hood Latch Assembly Secondary Latch Pivots Spring Anchor and Release Pawl Hood and Door Hinges 7 52 Chassis Lubricant GM Part No 12377985 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol GM Part No 12346293 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Fuel Filler Door and Rear Seat Tailgate Handle Pivot Points Hinges Latch Bolt and Linkage Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Squeaks Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Part No 12345579 or equivalent Synthetic Grease with Teflon Superlube GM Part No 12371287 or equivalent Part E Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services or Periodic Maintenance
16. Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you should file with the GM BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1804 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right
17. Crew Cab models have storage pockets and cupholders on rear doors Front Storage Area If your vehicle has this console compartment squeeze the front lever while lifting the top to open it You can store cassettes and compact discs in the slots in front of the compartment There is also a lift out storage tray in the console 2 59 If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment lift the cover to expose the storage area which includes slots for cassettes or compact discs and a coinholder Some vehicles may have a storage pocket on the back of the bucket or 60 40 bench seats 2 60 Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter Pull the front ashtray door down to open it NOTICE Don t put papers and other things that burn into your ashtray If you do cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire causing damage To remove the front ashtray pull the bin upward To use the lighter press it in all the way and let go When it s ready it will pop back out by itself NOTICE Don t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating If you do it won t be able to back away from the heating element when it s ready That can make it overload damaging the lighter and the heating element Sun Visors To block out glare you can swing down the sun visor You can also swing the visor from side to side Accessory Power Outlets If Equipped If you have accessory power outlet
18. If your vehicle has the bumper delete option do not bolt any type of hitch to the close out panel The close out panel will not support a hitch Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer For trailers up to 3 500 Ibs 1 589 kg you may attach the safety chains to the attaching points on the bumper For heavier trailers follow the trailer or hitch manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg loaded then it needs its own brakes and they must be adequate Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly Your trailer s brake system can tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system only if The trailer parts can withstand 3 000 psi 20 650 kPa of pressure The trailer s brake system will use less than 0 02 cubic inch 0 3 cc of fluid from your vehicle s master cylinder Otherwise both braking systems won t work well You could even lose your brake
19. Park in a lighted spot close all windows and lock your vehicle Remember to keep your valuables out of sight Put them in a storage area or take them with you Parking Lots Even if you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle it s still best to lock it up and take your keys But what if you have to leave your ignition key What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle Put your valuables in a storage area like your glove box If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system take the transmitter with you Lock all the doors except the driver s 2 16 Content Theft Deterrent If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a Content Theft Deterrent alarm system With this system the SECURITY light will flash as you open the door if your ignition is off SECURITY This light reminds you to activate the theft deterrent system Here s how to do it 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter The SECURITY light should come on and stay on 3 Close all doors The SECURITY light should go off after approximately 30 seconds The alarm is not armed until the SECURITY light goes off If a door is opened without the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter the alarm will go off Your vehicle s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for 110 seconds then will turn off to save the battery powe
20. To activate the bypass feature use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio on 3 Insert the adapter into the cassette slot 4 Within five seconds press and hold the REV and FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash showing that the broken tape detection feature is no longer active This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped pes q j pene pee Pp Po EN Playing the Radio PWR VOL Press this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume The knob is capable of being turned continuously RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this button When the radio is playing press this button to recall the station frequency 3 11 SCV Your system has a feature called Speed Compensated Volume SCV With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any particular speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV turn the control al
21. Trans 13 8 quarts 13 1 L 14 1 quarts 13 3 L Engine Crankcase Oil and Filter Change 2 2L Engine 4 5 quarts 4 3 L 4 3L EOSIN ssn4 bagel 4 5 quarts 4 3 L 4 3L Engine w Manual Trans 6 70 Fuel Capacity Reg Ext Cab 18 5 U S Gallons 70 0 L Crew Cab 19 0 U S Gallons 71 9 L Automatic Transmission Drain and Refill 5 0 quarts 4 7 L Differential Fluid Rear Axl sci3 cc5cme eens bytes 4 0 pints 1 9 L Front Axle 00005 2 6 pints 1 2 L Refrigerant Air Conditioning See Refrigerant Label under the hood After refill the level must be checked All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the appropriate level or as recommended in this manual See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Engine Specifications Engine Type VIN Code Firing Order Horsepower T Series Horsepower S Series Thermostat Specification Spark Plug Gap VORTEC 2200 L4 L4 5 1 3 4 2 N A 120 5 000 rpm 195 F 91 C 0 040 inches 1 01 mm VORTEC 4300 V6 V6 W 1 6 5 4 3 2 190 4 400 rpm 180 4 400 rpm 195 F 91 C 0 060 inches 1 52 mm 6 71 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing and are subject to change If a part listed in this manual is not the same as t
22. ball joints steering linkage parking brake cable guides propshaft splines universal joints and brake pedal springs A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule Drive axle service See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for proper lubricant to use Check fluid level and add fluid as needed If your vehicle has a locking differential drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 7 500 Miles 12 500 km C Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first ooo See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 15 000 Miles 25 000 km pepe eae Martie a every 12 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first OoOo S o See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seal
23. in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 21 000 Miles 35 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 24 000 Miles 40 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY g V Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 27 000 Miles 45 000 km a Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or ev
24. or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY TVS aaaaaaaaaaaaaasssssasiIiIiIsIi Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 54 000 Miles 90 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 57 000 Miles 95 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whiche
25. require change 4 3L V6 Engine Only Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV valve An Emission Control Service 7 28 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use MILEAGE Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test PF cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service SERVICED BY 7 29 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be performed after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be performed at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded 7 30 Lubricate the front suspension
26. vehicle s CWR 4 43 Refer to the Truck Camper Loading Information Label Here is an example of proper truck and camper match on the passenger s door for dimensions A and B as shown in the following illustration A Camper Center of Gravity B Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone Use the rear edge of the load floor for measurement y purposes The recommended location for the cargo The camper s center of gravity should fall within the center of gravity for the Cargo Weight Rating C is center of gravity zone for your vehicle s cargo load the point where the mass of a body is concentrated Campers can only be installed in a long box pickup and if suspended at that point would balance the Check your Truck Camper Loading Label on the front and rear passenger s door to determine if your vehicle can carry a slide in camper 4 44 You must weigh any accessories trailer hitches or other equipment you add to your vehicle Then subtract this extra weight from the CWR This extra weight may shorten the center of gravity zone for your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this If your slide in camper and its load weigh less than the CWR the center of gravity zone for your vehicle may be larger Your dealer can help you make a good vehicle camper match He ll also help you determine your CWR Secure loose items to pr
27. 60 40 Bench To adjust the front seatback lift the lever on the outside of the seat Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it Pull up on the lever and the seat will go to an upright position But don t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving 1 4 Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts can t do their job when you re reclined like this The shoulder belt can t do its job because it won t be against your body Instead it will be in front of you In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt can t do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Seatback Latches Regular or Extended Cab Only The front seatback folds forward to let people get into the rear seat or to access the storage area behind the seat To fold the front seatback forward push the lever on the side of the seat rearward and pull the seatback forward To return the seatback to the upright position push the seatback all the way back until the latch catches If the seatback was reclined before being folded forward it will
28. Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down BRAKE RELEASE 2 32 Pull the BRAKE RELEASE lever fully It is located on the bottom of the driver s side of the instrument panel NOTICE Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat You may have to replace them and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill see Towing a Trailer in the Index That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving Shifting Into PARK P Automatic Transmission Only It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps that follow Always put the shift lever fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake with your left foot 2 Move the shift lever into P
29. But please use the following steps to do it safely Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you don t follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you NOTICE Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn t be covered by your warranty The ACDelco battery in your vehicle has a built in hydrometer Do not charge test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won t work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system NOTICE If the other system isn t a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles aren t touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you don t want You wouldn t be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the procedure Put an automati
30. Ibs 2 724 kg Vehicle 2WD Extended Cab 2 2L LA Manual Trans 2 2L L4 Auto Trans 4 3L V6 Manual Trans 4 3L V6 Auto Trans 2WD Long Box 2 2L LA Manual Trans 2 2L L4 Auto Trans 4 3L V6 Manual Trans 4 3L V6 Auto Trans Axle Ratio Max Trailer Wt 4 10 4 10 3 08 3 08 3 42 3 73 4 10 4 10 3 08 3 08 3 42 2 100 Ibs 953 kg 3 000 Ibs 1 362 kg 3 800 Ibs 1 725 kg 4 800 Ibs 2 179 kg 5 800 Ibs 2 633 kg 1 700 Ibs 772 kg 2 200 Ibs 999 kg 3 100 Ibs 1 407 kg 3 900 Ibs 1 771 kg 4 900 Ibs 2 225 kg 5 900 Ibs 2 679 kg Vehicle 4WD Regular Cab 4 3L V6 Manual Trans 4 3L V6 Auto Trans 4WD Extended Cab 4 3L V6 Manual Trans 4 3L V6 Manual Trans w ZR2 4 3L V6 Auto Trans 4 3L V6 Auto Trans w ZR2 4WD Crew Cab 4 3L V6 Auto Trans Axle Ratio 3 42 3 42 3 73 3 42 3 73 3 42 3 73 3 73 3 42 3 73 Max Trailer Wt 4 200 Ibs 1 907 kg 5 700 Ibs 2 588 kg 5 700 Ibs 2 588 kg 4 000 Ibs 1 816 kg 4 400 Ibs 1 998 kg 5 500 Ibs 2 497 kg 5 500 Ibs 2 497 kg 4 900 Ibs 2 225 kg 5 200 Ibs 2 361 kg 5 200 Ibs 2 361 kg Tf your vehicle is equipped with RPO V4A Xtreme Sport Appearance Package your vehicle can tow a maximum of 800 Ibs 363 kg For more information on RPO codes see Service Parts Identification Label in the Index If your vehicle is equipped with a code 5 engine you m
31. Is the path ahead clear Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead Does the travel take you uphill or downhill There s more discussion of these subjects later Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you re not prepared When you drive over bumps rocks or other obstacles your wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you can t control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it s especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking In a way off road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what isn t Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road And this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking See Drunken Driving in the Index 4 17 Driving on Off Road Hills
32. Record your zone number 2 Press and hold both the MODE and the US MET buttons in the COMP TEMP mode 3 After five seconds the compass will acknowledge the variation mode by displaying the current zone number When it does release both buttons 4 Press US MET until your zone number appears on the display 2 58 5 Press MODE to enter your zone number Your variance is now set and the display will return to the COMP TEMP mode TRIP Once in the TRIP mode pressing the MODE button will step you through the following TRIP functions AVG ECON The average fuel economy since the last reset is displayed INST ECON Instantaneous fuel economy for the last second of driving is displayed RANGE The display indicates the estimated distance that can be travelled with the remaining fuel in the tank based on the fuel economy for the last few hours of driving FUEL USED The fuel used since the last reset is displayed AVG SPEED The average speed since the last reset is displayed To reset the trip computer press the MODE and US MET buttons simultaneously for at least two seconds All functions will be displayed briefly once the system is reset Reset can only be performed in the AVG ECON FUEL USED and AVG SPEED modes All three modes are reset simultaneously Sunglasses Storage Compartment The console has a sunglasses storage compartment Door Storage You will find a storage compartment on each door
33. Scheduled Maintenance Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 63 000 Miles 105 000 km a ooo Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 66 000 Miles 110 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY ok p i SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first a See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 21 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 69 000 Miles 115 000 km Co Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 mo
34. The cap has a spring in it if you let go of the cap too soon it will spring back to the right When you put the cap back on turn it to the right Filling a Portable Fuel Container clockwise until you hear a clicking sound Make sure you fully install the cap The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the NOTICE container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can If you need a new cap be sure to get the right be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others type Your dealer can get one for you If you get Dispense gasoline only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Don t smoke while pumping gasoline the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your fuel tank and emissions system may be damaged See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index Checking Things Under the Hood The
35. The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 6 51 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 6 52 Wheel Alignment and Ti
36. Wrench B Bracket C Jacking Instructions Roll and place tag behind the bracket after the tools are installed 5 28 Zam my Bolt Location Wheel Blocks Nut Rubber Band Jack Position Put the jack cover back on if you have one A Bolt B Cover Regular and Crew Cab C Cover Extended Cab Compact Spare Tire If Equipped Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new it can lose air after a time Check the inflation pressure regularly It should be 60 psi 420 kPa After installing the compact spare on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph 105 km h for distances up to 3 000 miles 5 000 km so you can finish your trip and have your full size tire repaired or replaced where you want Of course it s best to replace your spare with a full size tire as soon as you can Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again NOTICE When the compact spare is installed don t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails The compact spare can get caught on the rails That can damage the tire and wheel and maybe other parts of your vehicle Don t use your compact spare on other vehicles And don t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires They won t fit K
37. about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it s colder than 50 F 10 C drive the vehicle in THIRD 3 until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off but this is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50 F 10 C or more If it s colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to idle the engine longer Should the fluid level be low during this cold check you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level Checking the Fluid Level Prepare your vehicle as follows Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in PARK P With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in PARK P Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps The transmission dipstick is located near the center of the engine compartment See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a c
38. all lamps and close all doors or turn the ignition key to RUN 2 49 Mirrors Inside Day Night Rearview Mirror Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare from headlamps behind you after dark Push the tab away from you for normal daytime operation 2 50 Electrochromic Day Night Inside Rearview Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you A photocell on the back of the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside Another photocell built into the mirror surface senses when headlamps are behind you At night when the glare is too high the mirror will gradually darken to reduce glare this change may take a few seconds The mirror will return to its clear daytime state when the glare is reduced The mirror will also return to its clear daytime state when the vehicle is put into REVERSE R Press the AUTO button at the base of the mirror to turn on the automatic feature The button has an indicator light to show it is on Press the OFF button to turn the automatic feature off Time Delay The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which prevents unnecessary switching from the night back to the day position This delay prevents rapid changing of the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic Cleaning the Photocells Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the photocells when necessary Electrochromi
39. an idle for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone If you must drive turn off all unnecessary accessories Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible Shift Light You have the shift light if you have a manual transmission SHIFT Shifting when the indicator light is on will help you get the best fuel economy See Shift Light in the Index 2 73 Brake System Warning Light This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If it doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn t release fully If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released it If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the means you have a brake problem road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push Or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the v
40. and stay clear of the path the vehicle would they won t have to do all the work Descend slowly take if it rolled downhill keeping your vehicle under control at all times Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill you ll want to consider a number of things Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade This could How steep is the downhill Will I be able to maintain vehicle control g cause loss of control and a serious accident What s the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Apply the brakes lightly when descending a Hard packed dirt Gravel hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control 4 21 Q Are there some things I should not do when Q Am I likely to stall when going downhill ae 9 come count A It s much more likely to happen going uphill But if A Yes These are important because if you it happens going downhill here s what to do ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident When driving downhill avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill that s not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across You could roll over if you don t drive straight down Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL N or with the clutch pedal pressed down in a manual shift This is called free wheeling Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade 4 2
41. away as the fan clutch disengages If a Tire Goes Flat It s unusual for a tire to blow out while you re driving especially if you maintain your tires properly If air goes out of a tire it s much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you d use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely 5 17 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your hazard warning flashers Changing a tire can cause an injury The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people You and they could be badly injured Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent
42. can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Appearance Care in the Index With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid 6 35 Brake Wear If you have four wheel drive your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes If not your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are wom and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won t work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair 6 36 Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications If you have rear drum brakes
43. can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section 6 34 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid See Periodic Maintenance Inspections in the Index Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap Just look at the brake fluid reservoir The fluid level should be above MIN If it isn t have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake NOTICE fluid Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Use new brake fluid from a sealed Using the wrong fluid can badly damage container only brake system parts For example just a few Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area drops of mineral based oil such as engine around the cap before removing it This will help keep oil in your brake system can damage brake dirt from entering the reservoir system parts so badly that they ll have to be replaced Don t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish
44. certified to meet California Emission Standards indicated on the underhood emission control label it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and or your vehicle may fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask your service station operator whether or not the fuel contains MMT General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines If fuels containing MMT are used spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for service To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prev
45. door 2 14 Tailgate You can open the tailgate by pulling up on the handle while pulling the tailgate down When you put the tailgate back up be sure it latches securely Follow these steps if you want to remove the tailgate 1 Raise the tailgate slightly 2 Remove both retaining cables To remove each cable turn it so the end faces the front Then push forward so the larger part of the hole is over the bolt Pull the end over the bolt 3 With the tailgate halfway down pull the tailgate toward you at the left side and then move the tailgate to the left to release the right side Reverse the procedure to reinstall Make sure the tailgate is secure Theft Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal However there are ways you can help Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside it s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves so don t do it When you park your vehicle and open the driver s door you ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you Always do this Your steering wheel will be locked and so will your ignition If you have an automatic transmission taking your key out also locks your transmission Also remember to lock the doors 2 15 Parking at Night
46. even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem Air Bag Off Light If Equipped When you turn the right front passenger s air bag off this light will come on and stay on to remind you that the air bag has been turned off This light will go off If the right front passenger s air bag is turned off when you turn the air bag back on again See Air Bag Off Switch in the Index for more on this including important safety information for a person who isn t in a risk group identified by the national government that person won t have the extra protection of an air bag In a crash the air bag wouldn t be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there Don t turn off the passenger s air bag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group identified by the national government See Air Bag Off Switch in the Index for more on this including important safety information 2 71 If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the air bag it means that something may be wrong with the air bag system The right front passenger s air bag coul
47. have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code Press AM FM and this time the display will show SEC to let you know that your radio is secure The LED indicator by the volume control will begin flashing when the ignition is turned off Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps 1 Turn the ignition on LOC will appear on the display 2 Press MN and 000 will appear on the display 3 Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 4 Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 5 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show SEC indicating the radio is now operable and secure If you enter the wrong code eight times INOP will appear on the display You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again When you try again you will only have three chances to enter the correct code before INOP appears If you lose or forget your code contact your dealer Disabling the Theft Deterrent Feature Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps 1 Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN 2 Turn the radio off 3 Pr
48. is cool NOTICE If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you Climb a long hill on a hot day Stop after high speed driving Idle for long periods in traffic e Tow atrailer See Driving on Grades in the Index If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 If you have an air conditioner and it s on turn it off 2 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary 3 If you re in a traffic jam shift to NEUTRAL N otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving DRIVE D or THIRD 3 for automatic transmissions If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning doesn t come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park your vehicle right away If there s still no sign of steam push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you re parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone ou
49. locks including the glove box console doors the body hood secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl and any moving seat hardware Lubricate the hood safety lever pivot and prop rod pivot Part D tells you what to use More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment 7 45 Starter Switch Check 1 2 When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake See Parking Brake in the Index if necessary NOTE Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts On automatic transmission vehicles try to start the engine in each gear The starter should work only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If the starter works in any other position your vehicle needs service On manual transmission vehicles put the shift lever in NEUTRAL N push the clutch down halfway and try to start the engine The starter should work only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the floor If the starter works when the clutch isn t pushed all the way down your vehicle needs service 7 46 Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check 1 When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others
50. loose dirt Wipe vinyl leather plastic and painted surfaces with a clean damp cloth Cleaning of Fabric Carpet Your dealer has two cleaners Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner and Capture Non Solvent Dry Spot and Soil Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet They will clean normal spots and stains very well You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index 6 55 Here are some cleaning tips Always read the instructions on the cleaner label Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set Carefully scrape off any excess stain Use a clean cloth or sponge and change to a clean area often A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately or it will set Using Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner on Fabric 1 Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt 2 Always clean a whole trim panel or section Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines 3 Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on the container label to form thick suds 4 Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge Don t saturate the material and don t rub it roughly 5 As soon as you ve cleaned the section use a sponge to remove the suds 6 Wipe cleaned area with a clean damp towel or cloth 7 Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry 6 56 Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Stains caused by
51. next to the headlamp knob up to make your instrument panel lights brighter Turn the thumbwheel all the way up to turn on the interior lamps Illuminated Entry Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature When any door is opened the dome lamps will come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry and all the doors are closed or the front door handles are lifted and released the lamps will stay on for a short period of time and will turn off automatically If you use your keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle the interior lights will come on for a short time whether or not the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position 2 48 Exit Lighting With exit lighting the interior lamps will come on when you remove the key from the ignition to help you see while exiting the vehicle These lights will stay on for a short period of time and then will go out if the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position Front Map Lamps If Equipped If your vehicle has front map lamps they are located on the inside rearview mirror They will automatically come on for approximately 40 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the keyless entry transmitter if equipped or until the ignition key is turned to RUN or ACCESSORY The lamps will also stay on for approximately 40 seconds after you exit the vehicle unless you lock the doors wi
52. of 30 00 per day supported by receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Canadian Vehicles For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program Please consult your dealer for details General Moto
53. of the shoulder belt all the way out of positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock safety belt quickly if you ever had to To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position Regular Cab amp Extended Cab Models and in the Center Rear Seat Position Crew Cab Models SS F Don t use child restraints in these positions The restraints won t work properly 1 49 Jump Seats Extended Cab a BES E ine Don t use child restraints in these positions The restraints won t work properly 1 50 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Your vehicle has a passenger air bag If your vehicle is a regular cab pickup or an extended cab pickup there s a switch on the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the right front passeng
54. outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle the temperature indicated will be the last outside temperature recorded with the ignition on If the outside temperature is 37 F 3 C or lower the display will toggle between the word ICE and the current temperature every eight seconds This is a warning to the driver that road conditions may be icy and that appropriate precautions should be taken 2 57 The compass is self calibrating so it does not need to be manually set However if C Calibration is displayed the compass will need to be calibrated You may also place the compass in a noncalibrated mode by pressing and holding the MODE and US MET buttons simultaneously while in the COMP TEMP mode After about 10 seconds the compass will display C and you can release the buttons Drive the vehicle in a complete 360 circle three times at a speed of less than 5 mph 8 km h and the compass will function normally Once the calibration is complete the display will return to a compass reading Variance is the difference between magnetic north and geographic north In some areas the difference between the two can be great enough to cause false compass readings If this happens follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location 1 Find your location on the zone map earlier in this section
55. ready to warn you if there is a problem Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Canada United States This gage shows the engine coolant temperature If the gage pointer moves into the red area your engine is too hot It means that your engine coolant has overheated If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible See Engine Overheating in the Index 2 75 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Service Engine Soon Light in the United States or Check Engine Light in Canada SERVICE ENGINE SOON United States Canada Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction 2 76 NOTICE If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after a while your emission controls may not work
56. set the parking brake To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect 7 47 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year for instance each spring and fall You should let your dealer s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual See Service and Owner Publications in the Index Steering Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage tears
57. sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed accelerated corrosion rust can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ringlet shaped discolorati
58. sure to use an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child Anchor the top strap to this bracket regular or extended restraint will be placed cab Once you have the top strap anchored you ll be ready to secure the child restraint 1 46 When using a top strap equipped child restraint in a rear outboard seating position of a crew cab model route the top strap through the opening in the head restraint Then attach it to the anchor point for that seating position Once you have the top strap anchored you ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer s instructions say Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position Crew Cab Models You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Put the restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 1 47 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is 4 Pull the rest
59. the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 14 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 33 000 Miles 55 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 36 000 Miles 60 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 15 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 39 000 Miles 65 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service
60. the instrument panel Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player To load a cassette tape with the ignition off first press EJECT on the remote player Then insert the cassette tape The tape will play if the ignition is on but the radio is off Once the tape is playing use the control knobs for VOL AUTO TONE BAL FADE BASS and TREB just as you do for the radio A lighted tape symbol shows when a cassette tape is in the player A lighted arrow will also appear and show the direction of play when a tape is active The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal or CrO and adjusts for best playback sound Anytime a cassette tape is inserted the top side is selected for play first PREV 1 Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow in the opposite direction that the lighted tape direction arrow points to search for the previous selection A minimum three second blank gap is needed for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation and the sound is muted in this mode NEXT 3 Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow in the direction that the lighted tape direction arrow points to search for the next selection The tape direction arrow will blink during SEEK operation and the sound is muted in this mode REV 4 Press th
61. the radiator pressure cap off information about the proper coolant mixture 4 Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the ADD mark 5 15 6 Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fan 7 By this time the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck Then replace the pressure cap At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck reinstall the pressure cap Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this Engine Fan Noise This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan When the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most everyday driving conditions the clutch is not engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases when the clutch engages So you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine It will go
62. the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly 2 Put an automatic transmission shift lever in PARK P or shift a manual transmission to FIRST 1 or REVERSE R Turn off the engine Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle at the opposite end 5 18 SS i The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The jacking equipment you ll need is stored inside the plastic jack cover which is behind the front seats either on the center of the wall extended cab or on the passenger s side of the wall regular cab The jacking equipment for the crew cab is located behind the rear seat back on the passenger s side of the vehicle This is the jack cover for the extended cab The covers for the regular and crew cab are similar To remove it turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise Remove the jack cover Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove the wheel blocks jack and wheel wrench Your spare tire is stored underneath the rear of your vehicle See Compact Spare Tire later in this section for more information about the compact spare NOTICE Never remove or store a tire from to a storage position under the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by a jack Always tighten the tire fully against the underside
63. they don t have wear indicators but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise have the rear brake linings inspected immediately Also the rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing When you have the front brake pads replaced have the rear brakes inspected too Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets See Brake System Inspection in Section 7 of this manual under Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop your disc brakes adjust for wear If you don t have four wheel drive and your brake pedal goes down farther than normal your rear drum brakes may need adjustment Adjust them by backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you don t your brakes may
64. to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel See Fuel in the Index Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed 2 78 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Here are some things you need to know in order to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not working properly Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emi
65. uphill or downhill In short you ve gone right back to nature Off road driving involves some new skills And that s why it s very important that you read this guide You Il find many driving tips and suggestions These will help make your off road driving safer and more enjoyable 4 14 Before You Go Off Roading There are some things to do before you go out For example be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done Check to make sure all underbody shields if so equipped are properly attached Be sure you read all the information about your four wheel drive vehicle in this manual Is there enough fuel Is the spare tire fully inflated Are the fluid levels up where they should be What are the local laws that apply to off roading where you ll be driving If you don t know you should check with law enforcement people in the area Will you be on someone s private land If so be sure to get the necessary permission Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle Put heavier items as far forward as you can Be sure the load is secured properly so driving on the off road terrain doesn t toss things around Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers coul
66. will stay off until you shift out of PARK P or release the parking brake The following does not apply to vehicles first sold in Canada When necessary you may turn off the automatic headlamp system and the Daytime Running Lamps DRL feature by following these steps When the system is turned off the headlights will not automatically come on when it becomes dark outside 1 Turn the ignition to RUN 2 Press the DOME OVERRIDE button four times within six seconds After the fourth press of the button a chime will sound informing you the system is off 3 The system will revert back to the automatic mode when the DOME OVERRIDE button is again pushed four times within six seconds a chime will sound or when the ignition is turned off and on again As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Fog Lamps If Equipped Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions Your parking lamps or low beam headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to work The fog lamp switch is on the instrument panel under the headlamps knob Press the switch to turn the fog lamps on Press the switch again to turn them off A light will glow in the switch when the fog lamps are on The fog lamps will go off whenever your high beam headlamps come on When the high beam headlamps go off the fog lamps will come on again 2 47 Interior Lamps Brightness Control Turn the thumbwheel
67. you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression your vehicle can tilt even more For reasons like these you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline doesn t mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over Driving across an incline that s too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline don t drive across it Find another route instead Q What if I m driving across an incline that s not too steep but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill What should I do A If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping However a much better way to prevent this is to get out and walk the course so you know what the surface is like before you drive it 4 23 Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you re crossing an incline be sure you and your passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over yov ll be right in its path If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over 4 24 Gettin
68. 2 Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes Apply the parking brake Shift to PARK P or to NEUTRAL N with the manual transmission and while still braking restart the engine Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down If the engine won t start get out and get help Driving Across an Incline Sooner or later an off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill If this happens you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline Here are some things to consider e A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across When you go straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end But when you drive across an incline the much more narrow track width the distance between the left and right wheels may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Also driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill Loose gravel muddy spots or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If
69. 4 31 4 32 4 33 4 34 4 34 4 36 4 39 4 40 4 45 4 46 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads City Driving Freeway Driving Before Leaving on a Long Trip Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Winter Driving Recreational Vehicle Towing Loading Your Vehicle Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab Towing a Trailer Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts in the Index gt Defensive driving really means be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or freeways it means always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do Be ready for their mistakes Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance It s the best defensive driving maneuver in both city and rural driving You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call reading or reaching for something on the floor makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do
70. 42 3 Remove the bulb 4 Install a new bulb 5 Reinstall the lens and tighten the screws If equipment such as a cap or camper is installed on your vehicle a center high mounted stoplamp feed wire is provided along the driver s side rear frame This wire should be used to install a center high mounted stoplamp in the cap or camper Taillamps 1 Open the tailgate 2 Remove the screws from the lamp assembly near the tailgate latch 3 Pull the assembly away from the pickup side panel 4 Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it Push the tab in while you turn the socket 5 Pull the bulb out 6 Push the new bulb into the socket 7 Put the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise until it locks in place 8 Reinstall the assembly Install and tighten the screws 9 Close the tailgate 6 43 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear and cracking See Wiper Blade Check in the Index for more information NOTICE Use care when removing or installing a blade assembly Accidental bumping can cause the arm to fall back and strike the windshield 1 To remove the old wiper blades lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical position A Blade Assembly D Blade Pivot B Arm Assembly E Hook Slot C Locking Tab F Arm Hook 2 Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab Pull down on the bl
71. ARK P position like this Pull the lever toward you 2 33 Move the lever up as far as it will go 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the key your vehicle is in PARK P 2 34 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running Automatic Transmission Only It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Don t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you ve moved the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pulling it toward you If you can it means that the shift lever wasn t fully locked into PARK P Torque Lock Automatic Transmission If you are parking on a hill and you don t shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torq
72. Certification Tire label Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque in the Index Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index When It s Time for New Tires One way to tell when it s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that can t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage 6 49 Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need look at the Certification Tire label The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Perf
73. For more information see Heated Outside Mirrors in the Index Ventilation System For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed use VENT to direct outside air through your vehicle Airflow is through the instrument panel outlets Your vehicle s ventilation system supplies outside air to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving When the vehicle is not moving you can get outside air to flow through by selecting any mode and any fan speed You will find air outlets in the center and on the sides of your instrument panel 3 5 You can direct the airflow side to side by moving the thumbwheel located in the center of the vent The vent can be tilted up and down also To control the amount of airflow through the outlets move the thumbwheel below the vent Ventilation Tips Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work far better reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows When you enter a vehicle in cold weather turn the fan control to high for a few moments before driving off This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle Audio Systems Your audio system has been designed to operate easily and give
74. If you hold the switch at R A the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake You could be startled and even lose control So unless you want to go faster don t hold the switch at R A 2 43 Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Press the button at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal You ll now cruise at the higher speed Move the cruise switch from ON to R A Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want and then release the switch To increase your speed in very small amounts briefly move the switch to R A Each time you do this your vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control Press in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want then release it To slow down in very small amounts press the button briefly Each time you do this you ll go 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier 2 44 Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you m
75. Indicators Windows Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous A child can be overcome by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower your manual side door windows If you have power windows the controls are on each of the side doors With power windows the switches control the windows when the ignition is on in ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power in the Index The driver s door has a switch for the passenger window s as well Crew Cab Press the side of the switch with the down arrow to lower the window Press the side of the switch with the up arrow to raise the window Regular or Extended Cab Express Down Window The driver s window switch also has an express down feature that allows you to lower the window without holding the window switch Press the driver s window switch down briefly to activate the express down feature Lightly tap the switch to open the window slightly The express down feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the up arrow end of the switch Lockout Switch Crew Cab Four door vehicles have a lockout feature to prevent passengers from operating the power windows It is located on the driver s d
76. Jump Start No start situations which require a battery jump start will be covered at no charge Lock Out Replacement keys or locksmith service will be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle Delivery of the replacement key will be covered at no charge within 10 miles 16 km Emergency Towing Service Towing to the nearest GMC dealer for warranty related disablements will be covered Trip Routing Custom made computerized highlighted maps using the most direct or scenic route are provided free of charge Maps include points of interest and a list of GMC dealers along the route Also included is a list of hotels along the route that are discounted through affiliation with Quest International Trip Routing is available through Roadside Assistance by calling 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 Please be prepared to provide your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Allow five working days for fulfillment Trip Interruption Assistance GMC will reimburse any reasonable trip interruption expenses up to 500 00 when directly associated with warranty disablement Trip Interruption service covers expenses such as meals and overnight lodging if vehicle disablement occurs at least 150 miles 240 km from your home or rental property You will be required to obtain prior approval from GMC Roadside Assistance and pay for expenses at the time of disablement Original receipts should be submitted to GMC Roadside Assistanc
77. LIGHTING SWITCH v To signals lt J D gt PARKING M LAMPS N HAZARD WARNING FLASHER DAYTIME RUNNING O LAMPS FOG LAMPS x D These symbols are on some of your controls WINDSHIELD WIPER ey em eof it WINDSHIELD WASHER WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER VENTILATING FAN These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights ENGINE COOLANT ow fom BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM BRAKE O COOLANT al ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 7 ANTI LOCK Ges BRAKES Here are some other symbols you may see FUSE VY e LIGHTER oc HORN be a aa OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL Model Reference This manual covers these models Regular Cab Pickup Crew Cab Extended Cab Pickup Service Station Guide Tire Pressure See oak 6 See Section 5 7 Hood Release See Dra 6 Windshield Washer a Oil Dipstick Fluid See Section 6 See Section 6 For a More Detailed Look at What s Under the Hood See Section 6 Spare Tire Pressure See Sections 5 6 4 Fuel See Section 6 Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here you ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts 1 2 Seats and Seat Controls 1 32 1 7 Safety Belts They re for Everyone 1 11 Here Are Quest
78. Lamp Assembly 1 Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under One Piece Composite Headlamp System earlier in this section 2 Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly 3 Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the socket 4 Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place 5 Put the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and twist it clockwise until it is tight 6 Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle Install the two retaining clips Two Piece Front Turn Signal Lamp Assembly 1 Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under Two Piece Composite Headlamp System earlier in this section 2 Locate the locking tabs on the assembly Squeeze the tabs together and push that end of the assembly out while holding the tabs The assembly will swing out 3 Unplug the electrical connector 6 41 Center High Mounted Stoplamp 4 Turn the harness bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the socket 1 Remove the lens retaining screws 5 Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps 3 2 Remove the lens into place 6 Put the socket into the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight 7 To reinstall the assembly snap the outboard end of the lamp assembly back into the vehicle Then swing the assembly in and snap it into place 8 Install the two retaining clips 6
79. M1 or FM2 mode and then press PSCAN It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons Press P SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to a specific stored station PSCAN will light up on the display while in this mode If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in the radio display will show the channel number P1 P6 for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station Setting the Tone BASS Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass When the BASS control is turned the AUTO TONE display will go blank 3 17 TREB Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble When the TREB control is turned the AUTO TONE display will go blank If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them AUTO TONE Press this button to select among the six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the music or voice being heard Each time you press the button the selection will switch to one of the preset settings of CLASSIC NEWS ROCK POP C W Country Western or JAZZ To
80. Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service 7 42 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Part B Owner Checks and Services Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Part D At Each Fuel Fill It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil in the Index for further details Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant in the Index for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary See Windshield W
81. Press LOCK to lock all the doors Press LOCK again within three seconds and the horn will chirp Remote Panic Alarm When the horn symbol button on the key transmitter is pressed the horn will sound and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds This can be turned off by pressing the horn symbol button again waiting for 30 seconds or starting the vehicle 2 11 Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your dealer Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle any remaining transmitters must also be matched Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it 2 12 Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won t work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it s probably time to change the battery NOTICE When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these
82. RSE R and firmly apply the parking brake Once the shift lever has been placed into REVERSE R with the clutch pedal pressed in you can turn the ignition key to OFF remove the key and release the clutch If you are parking on a hill or if your vehicle is pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index 2 36 Parking Over Things That Burn Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Don t park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Engine Exhaust Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you can t see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if Your exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs weren t done correctly Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and Have your vehicle fixed immediately Running Your Engine While You re Parked Automatic Transmission It s better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know Idling the engine with the climate control system off could all
83. RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds indicating the feature is active 4 Insert the adapter into the cassette slot It will power up the radio and begin playing This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed 3 15 AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped PAU R m a T a PEY Aiea Lu Playing the Radio PWR VOL Press this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn this knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume The knob is capable of rotating continuously RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this button When the radio is playing press this button to recall the station frequency 3 16 SCV Your system has a feature called Speed Compensated Volume SCV With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any particular speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV turn the control all the way down Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster ve
84. Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 25 Four Wheel Drive Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to four wheel drive vehicles However they have two additional systems that need lubrication Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Periodic Maintenance Inspections in the Index 6 26 How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten plug What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you may need to add some lubricant When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1 2 inch 12 mm below the filler plug hole When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to
85. Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 OWNER S INFORMATION Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner s Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 20 00 Without Portfolio Owner s Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 15 00 CURRENT amp PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle OR ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time Visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at www helminc com For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover ORDER TOLL FREE Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt Please allow adequate time for postal NOTE For Credit Card Holders Only service If further information is needed write to the address shown below or call 1 800 551 4123 1 800 551 4123 Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return M
86. TR WHL uum atte Ae IGN Fuse Circuit Breaker A B 1 2 RDO IGN Usage Not Used Not Used Not Used Cigarette Lighter Data Link Connector 6 65 Fuse Circuit Breaker 6 66 3 10 11 Usage Cruise Control Body Controls TBC Cruise Module Cruise Switch Gages Body Controls TBC Instrument Panel Cluster B Power Parking Lamps Power Window Switch TBC Ashtray Lamp STR WHL ILLUM Headlamp Switch Body Controls TBC Headlamp Relay Courtesy Lamps Inadvertent Power Relay HVAC Control Head Turn Signal Instrument Panel Cluster Engine Controls Fuse Circuit Breaker 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Usage Interior Illumination Auxiliary Power Power Locks 4WD Switch Engine Control VCM PCM Transmission Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front Wiper STR WHL RDO IGN Radio Battery AMPF HVAC I HVAC Control Head HVAC Devices Anti Lock Brakes Rear Wiper Radio Ignition Engine Compartment Fuse Block INT ABS IGN RAP IGN STUD OL BAT B A 2 FUSE SPARE PULLER FUSES B TRLTAN LTTRN BTSI PARKLP HVAC HAZLP TRR TRN RTTRN STARTER TACHMSU WECHMSU TRL BU ECMI LDLEV VEH B U ENG OXYSEN AR DEFOG PR PRK coms Fpume suL tone Leer anorog TRL PRK LTHDLP LIFT HTOMIR HDLP PWR DRL nies RTHDLP MIRILKS ATC AC FOG LP TBC AIC FOG LP RT TURN LT
87. TURN FRPRK WAY PMP IGN G STOPLP HORN CHMSL JHDLPwr HORN IHTDSEAT RR WAV PRINTED IN USA CRANK The fuse block is located under the hood on the driver s side of the engine compartment See Engine Name Usage Compartment Overview in the Index for more TRL TRN Not Used information on location TRR TRN Not Used Remove the cover by turning the fastener TRL B U Not Used counterclockwise To reinstall the fuse panel cover push VEH B U Vehicle Back Up Lamps in and turn the fastener clockwise RT TURN Right Turn Signal Front LT TURN Left Turn Signal Front HDLP W W Not Used 6 67 Name LT TRN RT TRN RR PRK TRL PRK LT HDLP RT HDLP FR PRK INT BAT ENG I ECM B ABS ECM I BTSI B U LP A C W W PMP HORN IGN B RAP LD LEV 6 68 Usage Left Turn Signal Rear Right Turn Signal Rear Right Rear Parking Lamps Not Used Left Headlamp Right Headlamp Front Parking Lamps I P Fuse Block Feed Engine Sensors Solenoids MAF CAM PURGE VENT Engine Control Module Fuel Pump Module Oil Pressure Anti Lock Brake System Engine Control Module Injectors Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Back Up Lamps Air Conditioning Not Used Hor
88. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for GMC whenever it appears in this manual Please keep this manual in your vehicle so it will be there if you ever need it when you re on the road If you sell the vehicle please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it AS CERTIFIED WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE g We support voluntary technician certification How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If you do this it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle In this manual you ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly Safety Warnings and Symbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you don t you or others could be hurt
89. Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance For Two Wheel Drive vehicles only Clean and repack the front wheel bearings or at each brake relining whichever occurs first Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service 4 3L V6 Engine Only Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service 7 37 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 67 500 Miles 112 500 km a ooo Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking
90. Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating in the Index 6 27 A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and What to Use il DEE COL coolaitall Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C one half DEX COOL coolant which won t damage e Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you don t need to add anything else Protect against rust and corrosion Help keep the proper engine temperature Let the warning lights and gages work as they should NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid like alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixtu
91. ade the advisor will assist you with steps to take to make sure that the system is functioning properly If you cannot contact the advisor take your vehicle to your dealership as soon as possible for assistance Safety and Security Services e Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment If an air bag deploys a priority emergency signal is automatically sent to the center An advisor will locate your vehicle s position try to contact you and assist you in the situation If the center is unable to contact you an emergency service provider will be contacted Stolen Vehicle Tracking Call the center at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 to report your vehicle stolen The system can then locate and track your vehicle and the advisor will be able to notify the proper authorities Roadside Assistance with Location For vehicle breakdowns press the OnStar button An advisor will contact the appropriate help Remote Diagnostics If an instrument panel light comes on the center can perform a check of the engine on board computer An advisor can then recommend what action needs to be taken OnStar MED NET Med Net can store your personal medical history and provide it to emergency personnel if necessary Accident Assist An advisor can provide step by step guidance following an accident Remote Door Unlock To contact the center call 1 888 4 ONSTAR You will be required to provide your security information An ad
92. ade assembly to release it from the wiper arm hook 3 Remove the insert from the blade assembly The insert has two notches at one end that are locked by bottom claws of the blade assembly At the notched end pull the insert from the blade assembly 6 44 4 To install the new wiper insert slide the insert D notched end last into the end with two blade claws A Slide the insert all the way through the blade claws at the opposite end B The plastic caps C will be forced off as the insert is fully inserted 5 Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom claws Make sure that all other claws are properly locked on both sides of the insert slots NAN nawr Claw in Notch Correct Installation Incorrect Installation Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the hook slot Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly onto the windshield 6 45 Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions Underinflated tires pose the same danger about your tire warranty and where to obtain service as overloaded tires The resulting accident see your GM Warranty booklet for details could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut pu
93. advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you re ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you re not fresh such as after a day s work don t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it s ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course yov ll find experienced and able service experts in GM dealerships all across North America They Il be ready and willing to help if you need it Here are some things you can check before a trip Windshield Washer Fluid Is the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades Are they in good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the reco
94. ag system The module records information about the readiness of the system when the system commands air bag inflation and driver s safety belt usage at deployment 1 25 Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system Improper service can mean that your air bag system won t work properly See your dealer for service NOTICE If you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s air bag the bag may not work properly You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s air bag Do not open or break the air bag coverings Air Bag Off Switch Regular Cab and Extended Cab Models If your vehicle is a regular cab model or an extended cab model it has a switch on the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the right front passenger s air bag 1 26 This switch should only be turned to AIR BAG OFF if Medical Condition A passenger has a medical the person in the right front passenger s position is a condition which according to his or her physician member of a passenger risk group identified by the causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk national government as follows P 8 g top p for the passenger and Infant An infant less than 1 year old must ride in the Pont sedi because makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag in a crash gr
95. air bag before using a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat position 1 44 Where to Put the Restraint Crew Cab Pickup Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat General Motors therefore recommends that child restraints be secured in a rear seat outside position including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat Here s why A child riding in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat but before you do always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat There is limited space in the rear seating area of a crew cab pickup model If you want to secure a child restraint in a rear outside seating position of a crew cab model be sure to study the instructions that came with your child restraint to see if there is enough room to secure your seat properly Don t secure a child restraint in the center r
96. air of pushbuttons Setting the Tone BASS Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease bass TREB Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Adjusting the Speakers BAL Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player If Equipped garm eae 2S 4 ee ee G L mt I E JFE et Lat rair an aen i j Playing the Radio VOLUME This knob turns the system on and off and controls the volume To increase volume and turn the radio on turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume and turn the radio off RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this knob When the radio is playing press this knob to recall the station frequency Finding a Station AM FM Press the lower knob to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 TUNE Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations SEEK Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station PUSHBUTTONS The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 21 statio
97. aler a service station or a local recycling center for help 6 17 VORTEC 2200 L4 Engine VORTEC 4300 V6 Engine See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location To remove either engine air cleaner filter do the following 1 Remove the fasteners that hold the cover on 2 Remove the cover and lift out the engine air cleaner filter 3 4 Reinstall the engine air cleaner filter cover Insert a new air filter Tighten the fasteners to hold the cover in place Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when Automatic Transmission Fluid to replace the engine air cleaner filter See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change both the fluid and filter every 15 000 miles 25 000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter more ofthese conditions off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops flame if Jn heavy city traffic where the outside temperature the engine backfires If it isn t there and the regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher engine backfires you could be burned Don t In hilly or mountainous terrain drive with it off and be careful working on the e engine with the air cleaner filter off When doing
98. also technical information about your vehicle and a part devoted to its appearance care 6 2 Service 6 32 6 3 Fuel Gasoline 6 33 6 5 Fuel E 85 85 Ethanol 6 37 6 7 Fuels in Foreign Countries 6 38 6 7 Filling Your Tank 6 44 6 9 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6 46 6 10 Checking Things Under the Hood 6 55 6 13 Engine Oil 6 55 6 18 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 57 6 19 Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 58 6 23 Manual Transmission Fluid 6 62 6 24 Hydraulic Clutch 6 63 6 25 Rear Axle 6 63 6 26 Four Wheel Drive 6 64 6 27 Engine Coolant 6 69 6 31 Radiator Pressure Cap 6 70 6 31 Power Steering Fluid 6 72 Windshield Washer Fluid Brakes Battery Bulb Replacement Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Tires Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Care of Safety Belts Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Chart Vehicle Identification Number VIN Service Parts Identification Label Electrical System Replacement Bulbs Capacities and Specifications Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you ll go to your dealer for all your service needs You ll get genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco n T NINE adele Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do
99. an weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only Driving in Water Light rain causes no special off road driving problems But heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it If it s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe don t try it you probably won t get through Also water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts If the water isn t too deep then drive through it slowly At fast speeds water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water And as long as your tailpipe is under water you ll never be able to start your engine When you go through water remember that when your brakes get wet it may take you longer to stop Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it s only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Don t drive through rushing water See Driving Through Water in the Index for more information on driving through water 4 25 After Off Road Driving Driving at Night Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
100. anding protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Q A What are the different types of add on child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs 1 39 Newborn infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because a newborn infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing seat settles into the restrai
101. as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible 6 59 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels If Equipped Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Don t use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Don t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels 6 60 Cleaning Tires To clean your tires use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner NOTICE When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle Petroleum based products may damage the paint finish and tires Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make
102. as well your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty NOTICE Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON OR CHECK ENGINE light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test This light should come on as a check to show you it is working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light doesn t come on have it repaired This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways e Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required If the Light Is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle Reducing vehicle speed Avoiding hard ac
103. as you press the accelerator pedal 2 28 NOTICE Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving could damage your transmission Use REVERSE R along with the parking brake for parking your vehicle Shift Light If you have a manual transmission you have a SHIFT light SHIFT This light will show you when to shift to the next higher gear for best fuel economy When this light comes on you can shift to the next higher gear if weather road and traffic conditions let you For the best fuel economy accelerate slowly and shift when the light comes on While you accelerate it is normal for the light to go on and off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift Shift Speeds If you skip a gear when you downshift you could lose control of your vehicle You could injure yourself or others Don t shift down more than one gear at a time when you downshift Four Wheel Drive If Equipped If your vehicle has four wheel drive you can send your engine s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction To get the most satisfaction out of four wheel drive you must be familiar with its operation Read the part that follows before using four wheel drive You should use two wheel drive 2HI for most normal driving conditions OTICE Driving in the 4HI or 4LO positions for a long time on dry o
104. ase button down at the same time Pull the key straight out On automatic transmission vehicles turn the key to LOCK and pull it straight out Retained Accessory Power RAP Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory Power RAP feature which will allow certain features on your vehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF Your radio and power windows will work when the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF these features will continue to work for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened Starting Your Engine Automatic Transmission Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine won t start in any other position that s a safety feature To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only NOTICE Don t try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped Manual Transmission The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the parking brake engaged Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine Your vehicle won t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down that s a safety feature Starting Your VORTEC 2200 L4 Engine 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn your ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your
105. asher Fluid in the Index for further details At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures Don t forget to check your spare tire See Tires in the Index for further details Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play See Audio Systems in the Index for further details 7 43 At Least Twice a Year Restraint System Check Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield Also see Wiper Blades Cleaning in the Index 7 44 Spare Tire Check At least twice a year after the monthly inflation check of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to the correct tire inflation pressure make sure that the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the whee
106. at road conditions may be icy and that appropriate precautions should be taken The compass is self calibrating so it does not need to be manually set However when your vehicle is new the compass may function erratically If it does CAL Calibration will appear on the display To correct the problem drive in a complete 360 circle three times and the compass will function normally Variance is the difference between magnetic north and geographic north In some areas the difference between the two can be great enough to cause false compass readings If this happens follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location Find your location on the zone map Record your zone number Press and hold both the ON OFF and the US MET buttons The display will go off After five seconds VAR CAL will appear on the display When it does release both buttons Press US MET until your zone number appears on the display Press ON OFF to enter your zone number Your variance is now set Driver Information System If Equipped This system displays the outside air temperature compass direction and trip information in the overhead console US MET The US MET United States metric button allows you to switch the display between the English and metric system MODE The MODE button can be used to toggle between three modes of operation OFF COMP TEMP and TRIP COMP TEMP The display provides the
107. ate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don t get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone isn t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot 4 12 Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that your right outside mirror is convex The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Don t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashin
108. ate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 35 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 50 000 Miles 83 000 km If you haven t used your vehicle under severe conditions listed previously and ACTUAL therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the Lo fluid and filter Manual transmission fluid doesn t require change 52 500 Miles 87 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service MILEAGE SERVIC Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first FP See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first i i See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 7 36 Long
109. ay be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner Bon Ami Powder non scratching glass cleaning powder GM Part No 1050011 The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn 6 58 Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Don t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Don t use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials
110. ay want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down Of course applying the brake takes you out of cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don t use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch pedal if you have a manual transmission Move the cruise switch to OFF Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set speed memory is erased Exterior Lamps O DOME OVERRIDE Your parking lamp and headlamp knob is on the driver s side of your instrument panel Turn the knob clockwise to the parking lamps symbol to manually turn on the following e Parking Lamps Sidemarker Lamps Taillamps License Plate Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights Turn the knob clockwise to the master lamps symbol to turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn off your lamps and put the system in auto headlamp mode Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside your automatic headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps and the inst
111. b is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows don t go on at all when you Windshield Washer signal a turn check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Cruise Control If Equipped Breakers in the Index and for burned out bulbs 2 39 Turn Signal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal To turn off the chime move the turn signal lever to the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low to high beam or high to low beam pull the multifunction lever all the way toward you Then release it When the high beam headlamps are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on 2 40 Flash To Pass This feature lets you use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic position To use it pull the turn signal lever toward you but not so far that you hear a click If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam your high beam headlamps will turn on They ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you and the high beam indicator on the dash will come on Release the lever to return to normal operation Windshield Wipers You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it For a single wiping cycle turn t
112. be at 60 psi 420 kPa How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You can t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture 6 47 Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 6 000 to 8 000 miles 10 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It s Time for New Tires and Wheel Replacement later in this section for more information Make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools in the Index The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals 6 48 When rotating your tires always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here If your vehicle has a compact spare tire don t include it in your tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
113. burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe Turn on your hazard flashers You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful 4 38 Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You can t see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn t collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that s away from the wind This will help keep CO out Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the wi
114. c Day Night Inside Rearview Mirror with OnStar If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an electrochromic day night rearview mirror with the OnStar system The automatic dimming feature is turned on or off by pressing the far left button located on the lower part of the mirror face for up to three seconds When turned on this mirror functions exactly as the electrochromic mirror described previously with the exception of the three OnStar buttons located at the bottom of the mirror face See your dealer for more information on subscribing to OnStar See OnStar System in the Index for more information on using OnStar 2 51 Outside Manual Adjust Mirror Adjust your outside mirrors so you can see a little of the side of your vehicle You can fold them in before entering a car wash Pull the mirrors in toward the vehicle Push the mirrors back out when finished Power Remote Control Mirror If Equipped These controls are located Move the upper control to the left or right to choose the mirror then press the arrows located on the control pad to adjust the mirror 2 52 on the driver s door armrest Convex Outside Mirror A convex mirror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver s seat A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane you could hit a vehicle Check your inside mir
115. c transmission vehicle in PARK P and a manual transmission vehicle in NEUTRAL Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or accessory power outlets if you have this option Turn off all lamps that aren t needed as well as radios This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries In addition it could save your radio Open the hoods and locate the batteries Find the positive and negative terminals on each battery Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You don t need to add water to the ACDelco battery installed in every new GM vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you don t explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Don t get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables don t have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you
116. can be added on the following record pages Also you should retain all maintenance receipts Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will find out how to contact GMC if you need assistance This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects 8 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 8 Courtesy Transportation 8 4 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone 8 9 Warranty Information TTY Users 8 10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United 8 4 Customer Assistance Offices States Government 8 5 GM Mobility Program for Persons 8 10 Reporting Safety Defects to the with Disabilities Canadian Government 8 6 Roadside Assistance 8 11 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 8 7 Canadian Roadside Assistance Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to GMC Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions o
117. celerations Avoiding steep uphill grades e If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so Stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling Your Tank in the Index The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off 2 77 Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure
118. cent of the total loaded trailer weight B If you re using a weight distributing hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver s door above the door latch or see Tire Loading in the Index Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you ll need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow If you use a step bumper hitch your bumper could be damaged in sharp turns Make sure you have ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper If you ll be pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 3 500 Ibs 1 589 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you re driving e
119. chever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote For Two Wheel Drive vehicles only Clean and repack the front wheel bearings or at each brake relining whichever occurs first Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km 7 11 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 18 000 Miles 30 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation
120. connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive and negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part Don t connect positive to negative or you ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery Don t let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery 8 Now connect the black negative cable to the good battery s negative terminal Don t let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable doesn t go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part on the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery 10 11 12 Attach the cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for awhile Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery If it won t start after a few tries make sure all connections are good If it still won t start it probably needs service Use the following procedure to remove the jumper cables Take care that they don t touch each other or any other
121. could be injured Follow the steps below Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake in the Index if necessary NOTE Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move With the engine off turn the key to the RUN position but don t start the engine Without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P your vehicle needs service Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position With an automatic transmission the key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK P With a manual transmission the key should turn to LOCK only when you press the key release button On all vehicles the key should come out only in LOCK Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission PARK P Mechanism Check When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake
122. course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any anti lock brake system ABS helps avoid only the braking skid 4 13 Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle This off road guide is for vehicles that have four wheel drive Also see Anti Lock Brakes in the Index If your vehicle doesn t have four wheel drive you shouldn t drive off road unless you re on a level solid surface Off road driving can be great fun But it does have some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself Off roading means you ve left the great North American road system behind Traffic lanes aren t marked Curves aren t banked There are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough
123. d be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible You ll find other important information in this manual See Vehicle Loading Luggage Carrier and Tires in the Index Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns GM recognizes these concerns and urges every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving obey all posted regulations Avoid any driving practice that could damage the environment shrubs flowers trees grasses or disturb wildlife this includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground Always carry a litter bag make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving Take extreme care with open fires where permitted cam
124. d inflate even though the switch is off If this ever happens don t let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right front passenger s position for example don t secure a rear facing child restraint in your vehicle until you have your vehicle serviced 2 72 Charging System Indicator Light The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition but the engine is not running as a check to show you it is working It should go out once the engine is running If it stays on or comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with the charging system It could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt or another electrical problem Have it checked right away Driving while this light is on could drain your battery If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to turn off all your accessories such as the radio and air conditioner Voltmeter Gage When your engine is not running but the ignition is on in RUN this gage shows your battery s state of charge in DC volts When the engine is running the gage shows the condition of the charging system Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at
125. d level up to the bottom of the filler plug hole 3 Install the filler plug Be sure the plug is fully seated Hydraulic Clutch The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is self adjusting The clutch master cylinder reservoir is filled with hydraulic clutch fluid It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system Adding fluid won t correct a leak A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired 6 24 When to Check and What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often you should check the fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid See Owner Checks and Services and Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index How to Check and Add Fluid The proper fluid should be added if the level does not reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it s in place in the reservoir cap See the instructions on the reservoir cap Rear Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance
126. d off the air bag it means that something may be wrong with the air bag system The right front passenger s air bag could inflate even though the switch is off If this ever happens don t let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right front passenger s position for example don t secure a rear facing child restraint in your vehicle until you have your vehicle serviced To turn off the right front passenger s air bag insert your ignition key into the switch push in and move the switch to AIR BAG OFF The AIR BAG OFF light will come on to let you know that the right front passenger s air bag is off The right front passenger s air bag will remain off until you turn it back on again and the AIR BAG OFF light will stay on to remind you that the air bag is off 1 28 To turn the right front passenger s air bag on again insert your ignition key into the switch push in and move the switch to the ON position Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle You don t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system To purchase a service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Inde
127. d one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn t survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it s just a seat on wheels Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider doesn t stop The person keeps going until stopped by something or the instrument panel In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That s why safety belts make such good sense Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts and the Answers Q A Won t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I m wearing a safety belt You could be whether you re wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you re upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted I
128. dy to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water doesn t clean as well as washer fluid Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it s very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Don t use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with your washer system and paint DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for the location of the reservoir 6 33 There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won t work well or won t work at all So it isn t a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid won t correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you Il have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system If you have too much brake fluid it
129. e especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please don t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you re with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you re driving on snow or ice it s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle 4 6 Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That s perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That s reaction time Average reaction time is about 3 4 of a second But that s only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or th
130. e VIN at the top left of your instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number in the Index If you have the 2200 L4 Code 5 engine you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel up to 85 E 85 also see Fuel 85 Ethanol E 85 following If you have the 4 3L V6 engine use only regular unleaded gasoline Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications which were developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association AAMA and endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines In Canada look for the Auto Makers Choice label on the fuel pump Canada Only Be sure the posted octane is at least 87 If the octane is less than 87 you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive If it s bad enough it can damage your engine If you re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service But don t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you re accelerating or driving up a hill That s normal and you don t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging It s the heavy constant knock that means you have a problem If your vehicle is
131. e carried away As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle If this happens you and the other vehicle occupants could drown Don t ignore police warning signs and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires in the Index City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You ll save time and energy See the next part Freeway Driving Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light 4 31 Freeway Drivin
132. e could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an accident You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate action 4 35 Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving Have your vehicle in good shape for winter You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle 4 36 Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You ll have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful What s the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it s about freezing 32 F 0 C and fr
133. e damaged Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you re through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the starburst symbol This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Do not use any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol If you change your own oil be sure you use oil that has the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container If you have your oil changed for you be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle as shown in the following chart RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING SELECT THE LOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE HOT FOR THIS WEATHER SYMBOL SAE 10W 30 SAE 5W 30 PREFERRED COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED 6 15 As in the chart shown previously SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle However you can use SAE 10W 30 if it s going to be 0 F 18 C or above These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 NOTICE Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Inst
134. e done to pickups Owners should be aware that as manufactured there are differences between a chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which may affect vehicle safety For specific information on this pickup contact the GM Customer Assistance Office for your area See the Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet for Customer Assistance Office 4 45 Towing a Trailer If you don t use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle 4 46 NOTICE Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this part and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle Additional rear axle maintenance is required for a vehicle used to tow a trailer See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index Your vehicle may be able to tow a trailer To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section If yours was built with traileri
135. e for reimbursement A service representative will provide assistance when you call The Roadside Assistance services listed are available to retail and retail lease customers operating 2001 GMC light duty trucks for a period of 3 years 36 000 miles 60 000 km All services must be pre arranged by GMC Roadside Assistance Over the phone assistance such as providing the name of the closest dealer or minor technical advice etc is available to all owner operators of GMC trucks regardless of vehicle or mileage Just dial GMC Roadside Assistance at 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 Roadside Assistance prompt to reach a qualified representative who can assist you Text telephone TTY users call 1 888 889 2438 Your Roadside Assistance representative will ask for the following information when your call is received Vehicle Identification Number VIN Name and home address Telephone number and location from which you are calling Location license plate number and color of your GMC truck Mileage of vehicle and description of problem Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week 365 days a year including weekends and holidays Should you have any questions about roadside assistance call the GMC Roadside Assistance Center or contact your dealer Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty GMC reserves the right to make any changes
136. e in dim light and aren t even aware of it 4 27 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 28 Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet road you can t stop accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction isn t as good as on dry roads And if your tires don t have much tread left you ll get even less traction It s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you can t try to slow down before you hit them Wet brakes can cause accidents They won t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving
137. e parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the ADD mark start your vehicle If the overheat warning continues there s one more thing you can try You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly CAUTION Continued They are under pressure and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap but now push down as you turn it Remove the pressure cap 1 You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops Don t press down while turning the pressure cap If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left 3 Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture up to the base or the AI neck 5 Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank but See Engine Coolant in the Index for more 3 leave
138. e seconds to see how long the CD has been playing that track Elapsed time is displayed in minutes and seconds The track number will also appear when a new track begins to play Press RECALL again to return to the time display 3 19 AM FM While in the CD mode press this button to stop playing the CD and play the radio The CD symbol will still display but the word CD will be replaced with either AM FM1 or FM2 If the radio is turned off the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped CD AUX To switch between the player and the radio when a disc is playing press the AM FM button To return to the player press CD AUX When a disc is playing the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear on the display If the radio is turned off the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped EJECT Press this button to eject the disc from the player and play the radio When the same or a new disc is inserted the disc will start playing on track one If a compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than a few seconds the player will pull the CD back in The radio will continue playing When the ignition is off press this button to load a CD 3 20 Remote Cassette Tape Player If Equipped If you have an AM FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc Automatic Tone Control System that includes a remote cassette player the cassette player is located in the center of
139. ear seating position because the restraints won t work properly If a forward facing child seat must be secured in the vehicle s right front seat the seat should be moved back as far as possible However it is better to secure the restraint in a rear seat Wherever you install it be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Top Strap Some child restraints have a top strap or top tether It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision For it to work a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle If the child restraint does not have a top strap one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available 1 45 In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top strap and that the strap be anchored In the United States some child restraints also have a top strap If your child restraint has a top strap it should be anchored The three anchor points for the rear seat child restraint positions in the Crew Cab are located on the back wall behind the rear passenger s seat Anchor the top strap to one of these anchor points Be
140. eater than the potential harm from my vehicle has no rear seat turning off the air bag and allowing the passenger even if belted to hit the dashboard or windshield in my vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate h a crash a rear facing infant seat or the infant has a medical condition which according to the infant s physician makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition Child age 1 to 12 A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because If the right front passenger s air bag is turned off for a person who isn t in a risk group identified by the national government that person won t my vehicle has no rear seat have the extra protection of an air bag Ina although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear crash the air bag wouldn t be able to inflate and ae 5 seat s whenever possible children ages 1 to 12 help protect the person sitting there Don t turn sometimes must ride in the front because no space is off the passenger s air bag unless the person available in the rear seat s of my vehicle or sitting there is in a risk group the child has a medical condition which according to the child s physician makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition 1 27 If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when you have turne
141. ed in the past Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there s an air bag for that person Air bags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you re too close to an inflating air bag as you would be if you were leaning forward it could seriously injure you Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with air bags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle 1 21 Anyone who is up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see the part of this manual called Children 1 22 There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the air bag symbol The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Air Bag Readiness Light in the Index for more information How the Air Bag System Works The right front passenger s air bag is in the instrument panel on t
142. ed so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock safety belt quickly if you ever had to 6 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 1 54 To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger If you were using a rear facing child restraint in a regular cab model or extended cab model turn on the right front passenger s air bag when you remove the rear facing child restraint from the vehicle unless the person who will be sitting there is a member of a passenger air bag risk group See Air Bag Off Switch in the Index If the right front passenger s air bag is turned off for a person who isn t in a risk group identified by the national government that person won t have the extra protection of an air bag Ina crash the air bag wouldn t be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there Don t turn off the passenger s air bag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group See Air Bag Off Switch in the Index for more o
143. eep your spare tire and its wheel together NOTICE Tire chains won t fit your compact spare Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too Don t use tire chains on your compact spare 5 29 If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you don t want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you re stuck but you must use caution If you let your tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you re stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Don t spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer 5 30 NOTICE Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth you can destroy your transmission For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains in the Index Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First turn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels If you have a four wheel drive vehicle shift into 4HI Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear or with a manual t
144. eezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution Accelerate gently Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have an anti lock braking system you ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock in the Index e Allow greater following distance on any slippery road Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that s covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can t reach around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you re actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers 4 37 If You re Caught in a Blizzard Tie ared cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you ve been stopped by the snow Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you have no blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers
145. ehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition please maintain your vehicle properly Maintenance Requirements Maintenance intervals checks inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow recommended maintenance may not be covered by warranty How This Section is Organized This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services shows what to have done and how often Some of these services can be complex so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should let your dealer s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt have a qualified technician do the work If you want to get the service information see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Part B Owner Checks and Services tells you what should be checked and when It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections explains important inspections that you
146. ehicle in dusty areas or off road frequently You frequently tow a trailer If the vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engine oil to break down sooner Short Trip City Intervals Every 3 000 Miles 5 000 km Engine Oil and Filter Change or 3 months whichever occurs first Chassis Lubrication or 3 months whichever occurs first Drive Axle Service or 3 months whichever occurs first Every 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Tire Rotation Every 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection if driving in dusty conditions Front Wheel Bearing Repack 2WD only or at each brake relining whichever occurs first Automatic Transmission Service severe conditions only Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement Fuel Filter Replacement 4 3L V6 engine only Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Transmission Service normal conditions Continued 7 5 Scheduled Maintenance Short Trip City Intervals Every 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection Every 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Fuel Filter Replacement 2200 L4 engine only Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark Plug Replacement 4 3L V6 Engine Only Positive Crankcase Venti
147. ehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on there could be a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving 1 P with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you ve BRAKE pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service United States Canada 2 74 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light With the anti lock brake system this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds That s normal If the light stays on or comes on when you re driving your vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light isn t on you still have brakes but you don t have anti lock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on you don t have anti lock brakes and there s a problem with your regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light earlier in this section The anti lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be
148. elocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 96 000 Miles 160 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY ok p i SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first a See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 27 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 99 000 Miles 165 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Inspect spark plug wires ACTUAL An Tan Cono Service Replace spark plugs Oooo o oo yO An Emission Control Service If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Manual transmission fluid doesn t
149. elts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance 1 58 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you ve had a crash do you need new belts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new belts If you ever see a label on the driver s or on a crew cab right front passenger s safety belt that says to replace the belt be sure to do so Then the new belt will be there to help protect you in a collision You would see this label on the belt near the door opening ACAUTION To help avoid personal injury belt assembly must be replaced if this vehicle is in a collision or if Replace Belt appears below See Owner s Manual for more information Replace Remplacer Belt La Ceinture Printed in If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts re
150. eminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts unless the driver s safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds then it will flash for about 55 seconds If the driver s belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on 2 69 Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the air bag symbol The system checks the air bag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the air bag sensors the air bag modules the wiring the passenger air bag suppression circuit and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the air bag system see Air Bag in the Index This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your air bag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away 2 70 If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the air bag system may not be working properly The air bags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they could
151. en move the shift lever into the gear you wish See Shifting Out of PARK P in the Index REVERSE R Use this gear to back up NOTICE Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transmission Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transmission see Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow in the Index 2 25 NEUTRAL N In this position your engine doesn t connect with the wheels To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Don t shift out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing NOTICE Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine racing isn t covered by your warranty 2 26 DRIVE D This position is for normal driving If you need more power for passing and you re Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push your accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down You ll shift down to the next gear and have more power DRIVE D should not be used w
152. en you turn the key toward START The light will stay on until the engine starts SECURITY If the light flashes the Passlock system has entered a tamper mode If the vehicle fails to start see Passlock in the Index If the light comes on continuously while driving and stays on there may be a problem with the Passlock system Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock and you should see your dealer Also see Content Theft Deterrent in the Index for additional information regarding the SECURITY light 2 80 Service Four Wheel Drive Warning Light This light should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition as a check to show you it is working SERVICE 4WD The SERVICE 4WD light comes on to indicate that there may be a problem with the four wheel drive system and service is required Malfunctions can be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent which may prevent serious damage to the vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing a malfunction Check Gages Light If this light comes on and stays on while you are driving check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones CHECK GAGES Fuel Gage SI S HD UNLEADED m FUEL ONLY A United States Canada When the ignition is on the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have remaining Here are four thing
153. engine gets warm NOTICE Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter 2 21 2 If your engine still won t start or starts but then Starting Your VORTEC 4300 V6 Engine stops it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds This clears the extra gasoline from the engine NOTICE NOTICE Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn your ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dea
154. ent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system allowing your emission control system to function properly Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel In addition gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier NOTICE Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Don t use it It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage wouldn t be covered under your warranty Fuel E 85 85 Ethanol The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number VIN shows the code letter for your engine You will find the VIN at the top left of your instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number in the Index If you have the 2200 L4 Code 5 engine you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel up to 85 E 85 also see Fuel Gasoline listed previously If you have the 4 3L V6 engine use only regular gasoline Only vehicles with the 2200 L4 Code 5 engine may use 85 ethanol fuel E 85 Most service stations will not have an 85 ethanol fuel E 85 pump available Those stations that do have E 85 should have a label indicating minimum ethanol content Do not use the fuel if the minimum etha
155. er s air bag when you want to secure a rear facing child restraint at the right front passenger s position See Air Bag Off Switch in the Index for more on this including important safety information A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag If your vehicle is a crew cab do not use a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s position If your vehicle is a regular cab pickup or an extended cab pickup be sure to turn off the air bag before using a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat position If a forward facing child restraint is suitable for Unless your vehicle has the air bag off switch and the your child always move the passenger seat as far passenger s air bag has been turned off never put a back as it will go rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat Here s why Although a rear seat is a safer place you can secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat of a crew cab __ _ 151 If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the air bag it means that something may be wrong with the air bag system The right front passenger s air bag could inflate even though the switch is off If this ever happe
156. er your warranty Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn t be covered by your watranty To check on fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you ll be driving Filling Your Tank Fuel vapor is highly flammable It burns violently and that can cause very bad injuries Don t smoke if you re near fuel or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel The fuel cap is behind a hinged door on the driver s side of your vehicle If you get fuel on yourself and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle in the Index While refueling hang the cap by the tether from the hook on the fuel filler door To remove the cap turn it slowly to the left counterclockwise
157. erature knob turned counterclockwise This setting should be used to keep odors and or dust from entering the vehicle For normal cooling on hot days use A C with the temperature knob turned counterclockwise On cool but sunny days use BI LEVEL A C to deliver warm air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets If you have the VORTEC 4300 V6 engine when the air conditioner is on you may sometimes notice slight changes in your vehicle s engine speed and power This is normal because the system is designed to cycle the compressor on and off to keep the desired temperature Heating The heater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it On cold days use HEATER with the temperature knob turned clockwise BLEND is useful in cool weather when you have fog or ice on the windshield or side windows If you use the optional engine coolant heater before starting your engine your heating system will produce warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment in cold weather See Engine Coolant Heater in the Index Defogging and Defrosting On cool humid days use BLEND to keep the windshield and side windows clear Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the windshield quickly in extreme humid or cold conditions Turn the temperature knob clockwise and turn the fan control toward high If you have the heated outside mirror feature you can use it to defog or defrost your outside mirrors
158. ere is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn t covered by your warranty 5 11 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank If you haven t found a problem yet but the coolant level isn t at the ADD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid like alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 5 12 NOTICE In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engin
159. ers to buckle up Each jump seat has a lap belt with no retractor Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are it along the belt wearing safety belts 1 32 To make it shorter pull the belt as shown until it is snug Buckle and position it the same way as the lap part of the driver s safety belt See Driver Position in the Index Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle Don t use child restraints on these seats They won t work properly Rear Seat Passengers It s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who aren t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions Crew Cab 1 33 Lap Shoulder Belt Crew Cab The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder belts Here s how to wear one properly 1 34 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you v
160. ery 3 months whichever occurs first fF See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY oe P i SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first ae e E See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Continued 7 13 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Continued For Two Wheel Drive vehicles only Clean and repack the front wheel bearings or at each brake relining whichever occurs first 4 3L V6 Engine Only Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change
161. ery quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 3 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part aN 3252 are a a lt K S mi N FO P i So S es a F NS y K p g im as The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 1 35 The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very quickly out of t
162. ess the and 4 buttons together Hold them down until SEC shows on the display 4 Press MN and 000 will appear on the display 5 Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 6 Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 7 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show indicating that the radio is no longer secured If the code entered is incorrect SEC will appear on the display The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered When battery power is removed and later applied to a secured radio the radio won t turn on and LOC will appear on the display 3 23 To unlock a secured radio see Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss earlier in this section Understanding Radio Reception AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range however can cause stations to interfere with each other AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to come and go Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable unti
163. ess the steering wheel pad to sound the horn Tilt Wheel If Equipped If you have the tilt steering wheel you should adjust the steering wheel before you drive You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level then release the lever to lock the wheel in place Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Turn and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change To signal a lane change just raise or lower the lever The lever on the left side of the steering column until the arrow starts to flash Hold it there until you includes the following complete your lane change The lever will return by e Turn and Lane Change Signals itself when you release it As you signal a turn or a lane change if the arrows don t Headlamp Fag hows Beanvenaneet flash but just stay on a signal bulb may be burned out Flash to Pass and other drivers won t see your turn signal Windshield Wipers If a bul
164. event weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle When the truck camper is loaded drive to a scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings GAWR The total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label that is located on the rear of the passenger s door If weight ratings are exceeded move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings If you want more information on curb weights cargo weights cargo weight rating and the correct center of gravity zone for your vehicle your dealer can help you Just ask for a copy of Consumer Information Truck Camper Loading Trailer Recommendations You must subtract your hitch load from the CWR for your vehicle Weigh your vehicle with your trailer attached so that you won t go over the GVWR or the GAWR You ll get the best performance if you spread out the weight of your load the right way and if you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes For more information see Towing a Trailer later in this section Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners may consider having the pickup box removed and a commercial or recreational body installed However we recommend that conversions of this type not b
165. f Canada Limited You may write to Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you ll notify us Please call us at 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 or write Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 In Canada please call us at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French Or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 8 11 2001 GMC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check money order or credit card information to Helm Incorporated address below CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2001 GMC SERVICE MANUALS Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc RETAIL SELL PRICE 120 00 TRANSMISSION TRANSAXLE TRANSFER CASE UNIT REPAIR MANUAL This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for the 2001 GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases RETAIL SELL PRICE 50 00 SERVICE BULLETINS
166. f all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by calling 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 Customer Assistance prompt In Canada contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting GMC please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE
167. f my vehicle has air bags why should I have to wear safety belts Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you re in a vehicle that has air bags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That s true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions 1 11 Q If Pm a good driver and I never drive far from home why should I wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you re in an accident even one that isn t your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver doesn t protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone 1 12 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see the part of this manual called Children Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you ll want t
168. frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter NOTICE every 50 000 miles 83 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you re driving 6 19 How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick NOTICE Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C Athigh speed for quite a while In heavy traffic especially in hot weather e While pulling a trailer 6 20 To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C Get the vehicle warmed up by driving
169. fter an air bag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated Some components of the air bag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s air bag or the instrument panel for the right front passenger s bag will be hot for a short time The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags Air bag inflation doesn t prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle When an air bag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but can t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door Air bags are designed to inflate only once After they inflate you ll need some new parts for your air bag system If you don t get them the air bag system won t be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module which records information about the air b
170. funds
171. fuse block 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord won t reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 2 23 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you don t it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you ll be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area 2 24 Automatic Transmission Operation APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK PIRIN D3121 ooda0 Your automatic transmission has a shift lever on the steering column There are several different positions for your shift lever It features an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument cluster This display must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of PARK P This means that if your key is in OFF but n
172. g Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane 4 32 At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it s slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn t another vehicle in your blind spot Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in
173. g it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you re being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of Control Let s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration don t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency don t give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels aren t rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of
174. g Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly With the coolant recovery tank you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank but be careful not to spill it 6 30 __ C You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator For information on how to add coolant to the radiator see Cooling System in the Index NOTICE Your radiator cap is a 15 psi 105 kPa pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on
175. g out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand your wheels won t get good traction You can t accelerate as quickly turning is more difficult and you ll need longer braking distances It s best to use a low gear when you re in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don t get stuck When you drive on sand you Il sense a change in wheel traction But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is On loosely packed sand as on beaches or sand dunes your tires will tend to sink into the sand This has an effect on steering accelerating and braking You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand This will improve traction Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it s very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if you do get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws c
176. hange engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote For Two Wheel Drive vehicles only Clean and repack the front wheel bearings or at each brake relining whichever occurs first ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Continued 7 33 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Continued Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 4 3L V6 Engine Only Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service 37 500 Miles 62 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs fi
177. he band to MIST Hold it there until the wipers start then let go The wipers will stop after one wipe If you want more wipes hold the band on MIST longer You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes This can be very useful in light rain or snow Turn the band to choose the delay time The closer to LO the shorter the delay For steady wiping at low speed turn the band away from you to LO For high speed wiping turn the band further to HI To stop the wipers turn the band to OFF Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they re frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them If your blades do become worn or damaged get new blades or blade inserts Windshield Washer There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol on the top of the multifunction lever To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the paddle The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed In freezing weather don t use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision 2 41 Cruise Control If Equipped With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about PANGE 25 mph 40 km h or more or uae ia without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can l really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h
178. he hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer Then pull the hood down firmly to close It will latch when dropped from 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm without pressing on the hood Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick on j the VORTEC 2200 L4 engine is under the fill cap The engine oil dipstick handle on the VORTEC 4300 V6 engine is a yellow ring See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location 6 13 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you don t the oil dipstick might not show the actual level Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level 6 14 When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD line then you ll need to add at least one quart of oil But you must use the right kind This part explains what kind of oil to use For crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications in the Index NOTICE Don t add too much oil If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range your engine could b
179. he part used in your vehicle when it was built or if you have any questions please contact your GM dealer Engine Oil Filter Air Cleaner Filter PCV Valve Automatic Transmission Filter Kit Spark Plugs Fuel Filter Windshield Wiper Blades en lt _ _ SSsSSSSsSSSS SSSSS VORTEC 2200 L4 PF47 A1163C N A 24200796 41 948 GF481 Trico 20 inches 51 cm VORTEC 4300 V6 PF47 A1163C CV769C 24200796 41 932 GF481 Trico 20 inches 51 cm Vehicle Dimensions Wheelbase Reg Cab Short Box Reg Cab Long Box Extended Cab Crew Cab Length Reg Cab Short Box Reg Cab Long Box Extended Cab Crew Cab Height 2WD Reg Cab 2WD Ext Cab 4WD Reg Cab Short Box 4WD Reg Cab Long Box 4WD Extended Cab 4WD Crew Cab Width 108 3 inches 275 1 cm 117 9 inches 299 5 cm 122 9 inches 312 2 cm 122 9 inches 312 2 cm 189 0 inches 480 1 cm 204 9 inches 520 4 cm 203 6 inches 517 1 cm 202 8 inches 515 0 cm 62 1 inches 157 7 cm 62 2 inches 158 0 cm 63 8 inches 162 1 cm 65 4 inches 166 1 cm 63 8 inches 162 1 cm 67 6 inches 171 7 cm 67 9 inches 172 5 cm Front Tread 2WD 0 0 Wheel Offset 54 5 inches 138 4 cm 6 4 Wheel Offset 55 0 inches 139 6 cm 4WD 15 inch Tires 57 3 inches 145 4 cm 31x 10 5 Tires
180. he passenger s side Where are the air bags The driver s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 23 If something is between an occupant and an air bag the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear Don t put anything between an occupant and an air bag and don t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering When should an air bag inflate An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system s designed threshold level If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn t move or deform the threshold level is about 9 to 16 mph 14 to 26 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform such as a parked car the threshold level will be higher 1 24 The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers side impacts or rear impacts because inflation would not help the occupant In any particular crash no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows do
181. he retractor You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle 1 36 Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Infants and Young Children Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by the appropriate restraint Young children should not use the vehicle s safety belts unless there is no other choice 1 37 1 38 People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle A baby doesn t weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 lb 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint Children who are up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer outst
182. hen towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving Select THIRD 3 when operating the vehicle under any of these conditions THIRD 3 This position is also used for normal driving however it offers more power and lower fuel economy than DRIVE D You should use THIRD 3 when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or winding roads or for off road driving SECOND 2 This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy than THIRD 3 You can use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on You can also use SECOND 2 for starting your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces FIRST 1 This position gives you even more power but lower fuel economy than SECOND 2 You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in FIRST 1 while the vehicle is moving forward the transmission won t shift into FIRST 1 until the vehicle is going slowly enough NOTICE If your rear wheels can t turn don t try to drive This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object You could damage your transmission Also if you stop when going uphill don t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal This could overheat and damage the transmission Use your brakes or shift
183. her things you ll need to know to drive safely and economically D UNLEADED Standard Cluster Canada similar 2 66 SERVICE ENGINE 250 RPM X 1000 APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK PIRIN DIZ VOLTS Optional Cluster Canada similar 2 67 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running Simply press the trip odometer button You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer then it must be But if it can t then it s set at zero and a label must be put on the driver s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed 2 68 Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero To view the trip odometer press the button near the readout To reset the trip odometer hold the button until it clears Tachometer If Equipped The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm NOTICE On vehicles with a manual transmission if you operate the engine with the tachometer in the shaded area your engi
184. hicle speeds Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it SEEK Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking SCAN Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds The receiver will continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station until you press the button again The sound will mute while scanning PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just 1 Turn the radio on Press AM FM to select the band Tune in the desired station 2 3 4 Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer 5 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons The sound will mute When it returns release the button Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automatically selected for that button 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton P SCAN The preset scan button lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons Select either the AM F
185. ic transmission you can use THIRD 3 or as you need to a lower gear when towing a trailer Operating your vehicle in THIRD 3 when towing a trailer will minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your transmission If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer it s better not to use FIFTH 5 gear Just drive in FOURTH 4 gear or as you need to a lower gear weigh 2 000 Ibs 900 kg or less You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than 2 000 Ibs 900 kg You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Three important considerations have to do with weight the weight of the trailer the weight of the trailer tongue and the weight on your vehicle s tires 4 47 Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important And it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle The following chart shows how much your trailer can weigh based upon your vehicle model and options Vehicle 2WD Regular Cab 2 2L L4 Manual Trans 2 2L L4 Auto Trans 4 3L V6 Manual Trans 4 3L V6 Auto Trans 4 48 Axle Ratio Max Trailer Wt 3 73 4 10 3 08 3 08 3 42 1 800 Ibs 817 kg 3 200 Ibs 1 453 kg 4 000 Ibs 1 816 kg 5 000 Ibs 2 270 kg 6 000
186. ide edge of the door Move the lever up to engage the lock Move the lever down to disengage the lock 3 Close the door 4 Do the same thing to the other rear door The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use If you want to open the rear door when the security lock is on unlock the door and open the door from the outside 2 10 Lockout Prevention This feature protects you from locking your key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is open If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the driver s door will unlock Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle take your keys open your door and set the locks from inside Then get out and close the door Remote Keyless Entry System If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature you can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may ca
187. in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving in the Index 4 42 Payload The payload capacity is shown on the Certification Tire label This is the maximum load capacity that your vehicle can carry If you are using E85 ethanol fuel the maximum payload should not exceed 1000 lbs 454 kg Be sure to include the weight of the occupants as part of your load If you added any accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the factory remember to subtract the weight of these things from the payload Your dealer can help you with this 2 Tiered Loading By positioning four 2 x 6 wooden planks across the width of the pickup box you can create an upper load platform The planks must be inserted in the pickup box depressions The length of the planks must allow for at least a 3 4 inch 2 cm bearing surface on each end of the plank When using this upper load platform be sure the load is securely tied down to prevent it from shifting The load s center of gravity should be positioned in a zone over the rear axle The zone is located in the area between the front of each wheel well and the rear of each wheel well The center of gravity height must not extend above the top of the pickup box flareboard Any load that extends beyond the vehicle s taillamp area must be properly marked according to local laws and regulations Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of the rear axle See
188. ing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns NOTICE Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer your vehicle has to have extra wiring and a heavy duty turn signal flasher The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be
189. int be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer 1 43 Where to Put the Restraint Regular Cab and Extended Cab Pickup The child restraint must be secured properly in the right front passenger seat If you want to secure a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat turn off the passenger s air bag See Air Bag Off Switch and Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position in the Index for more on this including important safety information A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Be sure to turn off the
190. into PARK P to hold your vehicle in position on a hill Manual Transmission Operation 5 Speed This is your shift pattern Here s how to operate your transmission FIRST 1 Press the clutch pedal and shift into FIRST 1 Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you slowly press down on the accelerator pedal You can shift into FIRST 1 when you re going less than 20 mph 30 km h If you ve come to a complete stop and it s hard to shift into FIRST 1 put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch Press the clutch pedal back down Then shift into FIRST 1 2 27 SECOND 2 Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND 2 Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal THIRD FOURTH AND FIFTH 3 4 and 5 Shift into THIRD 3 FOURTH 4 and FIFTH 5 the same way you do for SECOND 2 Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal To stop let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal Just before the vehicle stops press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal and shift to NEUTRAL NEUTRAL Use this position when you start or idle your engine REVERSE R To back up press the clutch pedal After the vehicle stops shift into REVERSE R For vehicles equipped with the VORTEC 4300 V6 engine you must wait six seconds before shifting into REVERSE R Slowly let up on the clutch pedal
191. ions such as mountainous terrain subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations Global positioning capabilities used to deliver OnStar Service will not be available if satellite signals are obstructed OnStar will not function if the vehicle s battery is discharged or disconnected It may also be inoperative if the vehicle is in an accident and the OnStar or vehicle electrical system components are damaged Safety and security services are provided by existing governmental emergency service providers OnStar will use reasonable efforts to contact the appropriate emergency service provider and request assistance but cannot promise that they will respond to the call in a timely manner or at all The Instrument Panel Your Information System The main components of your vehicle s instrument panel are the following A Air Vents Instrument Panel Cluster my Aw F Brake Release G Passenger Air Bag Off Switch Electronic Transfer Case If Equipped Switch If Equipped H Ashtray Lamp Controls I Comfort Controls Fog Lamps If Equipped ZTO OR Accessory Power Outlets If Equipped Heated Outside Rearview Mirror Switch If Equipped Audio System Glove Box 2 65 Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You ll know how fast you re going about how much fuel you ve used and many ot
192. ions Many People Ask About 1 33 Safety Belts and the Answers 1 37 1 12 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 41 1 12 Driver Position 1 55 1 19 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 58 1 20 Right Front Passenger Position 1 58 1 20 Air Bag System 1 58 1 30 Center Passenger Position Rear Seat Passengers Extended Cab Jump Seats Rear Seat Passengers Children Restraint Systems for Children Older Children Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats how to adjust them and fold them up and down Manual Front Seat You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you don t want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving Move the lever under the front of the manual seat up to unlock it Slide the seat to where you want it Then release the lever and try to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked into place Manual Lumbar Support If Equipped If you have this feature there will be a knob on the outside of the driver s bucket seat Turn the knob toward the front of the vehicle to increase lumbar support and toward the rear of the vehicle to decrease lumbar support Reclining Seatbacks Bucket Seats or
193. ip Highway Scheduled Maintenance Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 97 500 Miles 162 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 41 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control Service Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Manual transmission fluid doesn t require change 4 3L V6 Engine Only Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV valve An Emission Control Service 150 000
194. is button to rapidly reverse the tape The tape will rapidly reverse to the beginning of the cassette reel or until you press REV again The radio plays the last selected station during REV 5 Press this pushbutton to turn Dolby NR on and off Dolby NR is active when a tape is inserted in the remote cassette The double D symbol will appear on the display Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation FWD 6 Press this button to rapidly advance the tape The tape will rapidly advance to the end of the cassette reel or until you press FWD again The radio plays the last selected station during FWD PROG Press this button on the remote player to go from one side of the tape to the other TAPE Press the AM FM button to switch from the player and the radio when a tape is playing To return to the tape player press CD AUX The lighted arrow will appear next to the symbol and show the direction of play when a tape is active EJECT Press this button on the remote player to remove the tape EJECT can be used with either the ignition or radio off Also you must press EJECT before loading a cassette with the radio off to allow loading 3 21 Theft Deterrent Feature If Equipped THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio It works by using a secret code to disable all
195. is setting directs most of the air through the instrument panel outlets and a small amount through the floor outlets gt o Vad BI LEVEL Air is delivered through the heater floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets e td HEATER This setting directs most of the warmed air through the heater floor outlets and some air through the windshield defroster outlets We Vad BLEND Airflow is divided equally between the heater floor outlet and the windshield defroster outlets SY DEFROST This setting directs most air through the windshield defroster outlets and some through the heater outlets Optional Climate Control System gt g 2 3 EX way 4 Fan Control The knob on the left side of the heating system control panel operates the fan speed To increase airflow turn the knob clockwise To decrease airflow turn it counterclockwise Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area of your vehicle Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer air Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air Mode Knob The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery OFF This setting turns the system off Some outside air will still enter the vehicle whenever the vehicle is moving forward MAX A C This setting provides maxim
196. itute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle If you are in an area where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C consider using either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures 6 16 Engine Oil Additives Don t add anything to your oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good performance and engine protection When to Change Engine Oil If any one of these is true for you use the short trip city maintenance schedule Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles 8 to 16 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic Your vehicle has a 2200 L4 Code 5 flexible fuel engine and you have used E 85 ethanol fuel You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off road frequently You frequently tow a trailer The vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break down sooner If any one of these is true for your vehicle then you need to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles 5 000 k
197. king around a battery without getting hurt Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods Also for your audio system see Theft Deterrent Feature in the Index 6 38 1 Open the hood Delco Fre mar Mina 2 Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up 3 Pull the headlamp assembly out 4 Unplug the electrical connector Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly Put the new bulb into the bulb assembly and reinstall it in the headlamp assembly by turning it clockwise until it is tight Plug in the electrical connector Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle Install the two retaining clips 1 Open the hood 5 Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly 6 Put the new bulb into the bulb assembly and reinstall 2 Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up it in the headlamp assembly by turning it clockwise 3 Unplug the electrical connector until it is tight 4 Pull the headlamp lens assembly out 7 Plug in the electrical connector 8 Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the vehicle Install the two retaining clips One Piece Front Turn Signal
198. ks the switch is located on the armrest Remove the ignition key and press LOCK to lock all the doors at once To unlock the doors press the raised area next to the key symbol Programmable Automatic Door Locks If Equipped If your vehicle has power door locks it is equipped with a feature that enables you to program your power door locks The following is a list of the available programming options e All doors lock Only the driver s door unlocks Press the lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel once and then the unlock side once If your vehicle is not equipped with remote keyless entry you may not be able to utilize this option All doors lock All doors unlock Press the lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel once and then the unlock side twice All doors lock None of the doors unlock Press the lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel once and then the unlock side three times No doors lock None of the doors unlock Press the lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel twice This turns off the automatic lock feature For more information see your dealer Your vehicle left the factory programmed to have no doors lock or unlock automatically You can set the automatic door lock feature to lock all the doors when the vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph 24 km h for two seconds and then unlock the door s once the key is removed from the ignition The fol
199. l This ensures connection to the center there is no additional action required Press the Call Answer End button to cancel the automatic redial 2 62 Emergency Button In an emergency situation press the emergency service button Upon receiving the call an advisor at the center will locate your vehicle and assess the situation If necessary the advisor will alert the nearest emergency service provider Call ANSWER END Button Use this button to answer a call If you are receiving a call the audio system will mute and the ring will be heard Press this button at the end of a call to disconnect and return the audio system to its previous settings This button will also cancel a call if one of the buttons is accidentally pressed or if the automatic redial function is activated Volume Control You can control the volume of the OnStar System using the volume control knob on the radio Q Telltale Light This light will indicate the status of the system A solid green light will come on when you start the vehicle to let you know that the system is on and is ready to make or receive calls If the light blinks green it means that an incoming or outgoing call is in progress Press the Call ANSWER END button if you notice the light blinking and you are not on a call The light will be red in the event of an OnStar system malfunction If this occurs press the OnStar button to attempt to contact an advisor If the connection is m
200. l commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we ve seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision At a BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up Ill be careful isn t the right answer What if there s an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There s something else about drinking and driving that many people don t know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries wors
201. l it is too late Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it 3 24 To help avoid hearing loss or damage Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly NOTICE Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle like a tape player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio be sure you can add what you want If you can it s very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine Delphi Delco Electronics radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly So before adding sound equipment check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants direct sunlight and extreme heat If they aren t they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of u
202. l the way down Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it SEEK Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking 3 12 SCAN Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds The receiver will continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station until you press the button again The sound will mute while scanning PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer 5 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons The sound will mute When it returns release the button Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automatically selected for that button 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton P SCAN The preset scan button
203. l the way counterclockwise to the automatic position or turn the instrument panel dimmer down to the fully dimmed position In the automatic mode the headlamps turn off once the ignition key is in OFF Daytime Running Lamps If Equipped Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset 2 46 Fully functional daytime running lights are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at reduced brightness when the following conditions are met The ignition is on the headlamp knob is in automatic headlamp mode the light sensor detects daytime light an automatic transmission is not in PARK P and the parking brake is released When the DRL are on only your headlamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps won t be on The instrument panel won t be lit up either When it begins to get dark the headlamps will automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps The DRL system on some vehicles may turn off temporarily while the turn signals are activated To idle an automatic transmission vehicle with the DRL off put the transmission in PARK P or set the parking brake To idle a manual transmission vehicle with the DRL off set the parking brake The DRL
204. l wrench to tighten the cable See Storing the Spare Tire and Tools in the Index Weatherstrip Lubrication Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Manual Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level add if needed See Manual Transmission Fluid in the Index Check for leaks A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss Have the system inspected and repaired if needed Automatic Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level add if needed See Automatic Transmission Fluid in the Index A fluid loss may indicate a problem Check the system and repair if needed Hydraulic Clutch System Check Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir See Hydraulic Clutch Fluid in the Index A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired at once At Least Four Times a Year Tailgate Lubrication Service Lubricate tailgate latch bolt handle assembly pivot points and hinges with lubricant recommended in Part D At Least Once a Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all body door and fuel door hinges latches and
205. lash showing that the broken tape detection feature is no longer active gt 5 Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer s recommended cleaning time If your vehicle is equipped with the AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 25 3 Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds 4 Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette 5 Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer s recommended cleaning time When the cleaning cassette has been ejected the cut tape detection feature is active again You may also choose a non scrubbing action wet type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own A non scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner The use of a non scrubbing action dry type cleaning cassette is not recommended After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced 3 26 Care of Your Compact Discs Handle discs carefully Store them in
206. lation PCV Valve Inspection Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first These intervals only summarize maintenance services Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages 7 6 Long Trip Highway Definition Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the conditions from the Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance are true Do not use this schedule if the vehicle is used for trailer towing driven in a dusty area or used off paved roads Do not use this schedule if you have the 2200 L4 Code 5 flexible fuel engine and you have used ethanol fuel 85 Ethanol E 85 Use the Short Trip City schedule for these conditions Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower Scheduled Maintenance Long Trip Highway Intervals Every 7 500 Miles 12 500 km Engine Oil and Filter Change or every 12 months whichever occurs first Chassis Lubrication or every 12 months whichever occurs first Drive Axle Service Tire Rotation Every 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Automatic Transmission Service severe conditions only Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Fuel Filter Replacement 4 3L V6 engine only Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement Front Wheel Bearing Repack 2WD only or at each brake relining whichever occurs first Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Transmi
207. lder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C
208. lean rag or paper towel Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again 6 21 3 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level The fluid level must be in the COLD area below the cross hatched area for a cold check or in the HOT area or cross hatched area for a hot check 4 If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 6 22 How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot A cold check is used only as a reference If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It doesn t take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Don t overfill NOTICE We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON III because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Manual Transmissi
209. ler If you don t your engine might not perform properly 2 Ifit doesn t start within 10 seconds hold your key in START for not more than 10 seconds Then push the accelerator pedal all the way down for five more seconds unless it starts sooner 3 If your engine still won t start or starts but then stops wait 15 seconds and start over When the engine starts let go of the key and the accelerator pedal 2 22 NOTICE Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you don t your engine might not perform properly Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle If you have the 2200 L4 VIN Code 5 engine and are using ethanol E 85 fuel with 70 or more ethanol in very cold weather the use of the engine coolant heater is important For more information see Fuel E 85 in the Index To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located on the driver s side of the engine compartment behind the underhood
210. lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons Select either the AM FM1 or FM2 mode and then press P SCAN It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons Press P SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to a specific preset station P SCAN will light up on the display while in this mode If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in the radio display will show the channel number P1 P6 for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station Setting the Tone BASS Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass When the BASS control is turned the AUTO TONE display will go blank TREB Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble When the TREB control is turned the AUTO TONE display will go blank If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them AUTO TONE Press this button to select among the six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the music or voice being heard Each time you press the button the selection will switch t
211. lish on leather Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately If dirt is allowed to work into the finish it can harm the leather Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water 6 57 Cleaning Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Don t use abrasive cleaners on glass because they may cause scratches Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window since they may have to be scraped off later Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material m
212. lity of a rollover Here are some things you must not do if you stall or are about to stall when going up a hill Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL N or depressing the clutch if you have a manual transmission to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This won t work Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control Instead apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle Then apply the parking brake Shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back straight down Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle it s steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around If you can t make it up the hill you must back straight down the hill Q Suppose after stalling I try to back down Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts the hill and decide I just can t do it What Logs Boulders should I do What s at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden Set the parking brake put your transmission creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks in PARK P or the manual transmission in If you decide you can go down a hill safely then try to FIRST 1 and turn off the engine Leave the keep your vehicle headed straight down and use a low vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill gear This way engine drag can help your brakes and side
213. lluminated before shifting your transmission into gear This will get you into 4LO but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore normal operation Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI To shift from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N or the clutch pedal engaged The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4HI switch You must wait for the 4HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph 4 8 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N or the clutch pedal engaged On automatic transmission equipped vehicles if your transfer case does not shift into 4HI your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment With your transmission in NEUTRAL N press and release the 4HI switch While the 4HI indicator light is flashing shift your transmission into PARK P Wait until the 4HI indicator light remains illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear This will get you into 4HI but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore normal operation 2 31 Parking
214. location How to Check Power Steering Fluid Turn the key off let the engine compartment cool down wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag Replace the cap and completely tighten it Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick For the 2200 L4 engine the fluid level should be at the C mark For the VORTEC 4300 V6 engine the level should be between the ADD and FULL marks If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the proper range What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing 6 32 Adding Washer Fluid Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY with the washer symbol on it See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location Add washer fluid until the tank is full Brak NOTICE ner Brake Fluid When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Don t mix water with rea
215. lowing instructions detail how to program your door locks Choose one of the previous programming options before entering the programming mode To enter the program mode you need to do the following 1 Begin with the ignition in OFF Then pull the turn signal multifunction lever all the way toward you and hold it while you perform the next step Turn your key to RUN and OFF twice Then with the key in OFF release the turn signal multifunction lever Once you do this you will hear the lock switch lock and unlock You are now ready to program the automatic door locks Select one of the previous four programming options and follow the instructions You will have 30 seconds to begin programming If you exceed the 30 second limit the locks will automatically lock and unlock to indicate you have left the program mode If this occurs repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 You can exit the program mode any time by turning the ignition to RUN the locks will automatically lock and unlock to indicate you are leaving the program mode If the lock unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming mode the auto lock unlock setting will not be modified 2 9 Rear Door Security Lock If Equipped With this feature you can lock the rear doors so they can t be opened from the inside by passengers To use one of these locks 1 Open one of the rear doors 2 You will find a security lock lever located on the ins
216. ls into the curb engine run while parked prefer ably on level ground 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels with the automatic transmission in PARK P or the 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the manual transmission out of gear and the parking brake applied for a few minutes before turning the engine off If you do get the overheat warning see Engine 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your Overheating in the Index parking brake and then shift into PARK P or REVERSE R for a manual transmission 5 Release the regular brakes regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 54 When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you Start your engine Shift into a gear and Release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid don t overfill engine oil axle lubricant belt cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to re
217. m be sure to get it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block is located at the driver s end of the instrument panel Remove the cover by turning the fastener counterclockwise Extra fuses and the fuse extractor are provided in the cover To reinstall the fuse panel cover push in and turn the fastener clockwise ee BATT PWR ctsyiP CIGAR HVAC Hvac CRUISE PWR LKS NOILYWHOJNI HOO 1d ASNA a WPR WPR RDO S
218. m or 3 months whichever occurs first If none of them is true use the long trip highway maintenance schedule Change the oil and filter every 7 500 miles 12 500 km or 12 months whichever occurs first Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower Remote Oil Filter Four Wheel Drive The access door for the remote oil filter is in the steering linkage shield assembly located under the radiator support Turn the screw to unlock or lock the door Make sure if you open the door it is securely closed when you are finished What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Don t let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a real threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all free flowing oil from the filter before disposal Don t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil ask your de
219. make your trips safer and more enjoyable See Off Road Driving in the Index for information about driving off road Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transmission These parts can work hard on mountain roads Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill If you don t shift down your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Know how to go uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission and you can climb the hill better Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Don t swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert Ther
220. may even have to damage your vehicle to get in So be sure you have extra keys Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle won t open it You increase the If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle call the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in GM Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside a crash if the doors aren t locked So wear Assistance Center in the Index for more information safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle You can use the keyless entry system if you have this feature You can also use your key to unlock your door from the outside To lock your door from the inside slide the lever on the inside of the door down To unlock the door slide the lever on the inside of the Nj door up You will see a red area on the lever You can also use the power door lock switch if equipped If your vehicle has power door loc
221. metal Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part B Good Battery C Dead Battery To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following procedure 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the heavy unpainted metal engine part on the vehicle that had the dead battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the negative terminal on the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance and Recreational Vehicle Towing in the Index Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle s instrument panel See Gages in the Index If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine
222. mmended pressure Weather Forecasts What s the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system Maps Do you have up to date maps 4 33 Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Don t let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently e If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency 4 34 Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain If you drive regularly in steep country or if you re planning to visit there here are some tips that can
223. n Column Feed IGN 2 3 4 Retained Accessory Power Not Used Name OXYSEN IGN E MIR LKS FOG LP IGN A STUD 2 PARKLP LR PRK IGN C HTDSEAT HVAC TRCHMSL RRDFOG TBC CRANK HAZLP VECHMSL HTDMIR ATC STOPLP RR W W Usage Oxygen Sensor Engine Mirrors Door Locks Fog Lamps Starting and Charging IGN 1 Accessory Feeds Electric Brake Parking Lamps Left Rear Parking Lamps Starter Solenoid Fuel Pump PRNDL Not Used HVAC System Not Used Not Used Truck Body Computer Clutch Switch NSBU Switch Hazard Lamps Vehicle Center High Mounted Stoplamp Heated Outside Mirrors Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Stoplamps Not Used Replacement Bulbs Lamps Halogen Headlamps Composite Low Beam Halogen Headlamps Composite High Beam Tail and Stoplamps Rear Sidemarker Lamps Front Sidemarker Lamps Front Turn Signal Lamps Center High Mounted Stoplamp Quantity 2 N NY NY NY NY WN Number 9006 HB4 or 9006 LL 9005 HB3 3057 194 194NA 3457A 577 6 69 Capacities and Specifications Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the index for more information See refrigerant change label under the hood for charge capacity information and requirements Wheel Nut Torque 100 Ib ft 140 N m Tire Pressure See the Certification Tire label See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index Cooling System 2 2L BOSE h 5 ex eee ee eee 9 9 quarts 9 4 L 4 3L Engine w Auto
224. n AM and FM The display shows your selection TUNE Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations SEEK Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there SCAN Select either AM FM1 or FM2 mode and press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few seconds of each radio station SCAN will light up on the display The radio will automatically SCAN to the next higher station play that station for a few seconds then SCAN to the next higher station Press VOLUME or both SEEK buttons to stop scanning PUSHBUTTONS The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 14 stations seven AM and seven FM Just 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press SET SET will appear on the display 5 Press one of the four pushbuttons within five seconds Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton In addition to the four stations already set up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time Just 1 Tune in the desired station 2 Press SET SET will appear on the display 3 Press two adjoining buttons at the same time within five seconds Whenever you press the same two buttons the station you set will return 4 Repeat the steps for each p
225. n go to the front of the vehicle and release the secondary hood release Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine Hood Release To open the hood first pull the handle located inside the vehicle on the lower left side of the instrument panel Lift the hood release the hood prop from its retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood 6 10 Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the VORTEC 2200 L4 engine you ll see A Battery E Power Steering Reservoir H Engine Compartment B Coolant Recovery Tank F Brake Master Cylinder Fuse Block C Automatic Transmission Dipstick G Engine Air Cleaner Filter I Windshield Washer D Engine Oil Fill Cap and Dipstick Fluid Reservoir When you open the hood on the VORTEC 4300 V6 engine you see A Battery E Automatic Transmission Dipstick I Engine Compartment B Coolant Recovery Tank F Power Steering Reservoir Fuse Block C Engine Oil Dipstick G Brake Master Cylinder J Windshield Washer D Engine Oil Fill H Engine Air Cleaner Filter Fluid Reservoir Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop Remove t
226. n this including important safety information Older Children Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A If possible an older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash In acrash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts If you have the choice a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide 1 55 Q What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck A Move the child toward the center of the vehicle but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child s face or neck you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt if your
227. nctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index CAUTION Continued 6 46 Inflation Tire Pressure The Certification Tire label which is on the driver s door edge above the door latch shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they re cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than mile 1 6 km NOTICE Don t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right It s not If your tires don t have enough air underinflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Bad wear Bad handling Bad fuel economy NOTICE Continued NOTICE Continued If your tires have too much air overinflation you can get the following Unusual wear Bad handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Also check the tire pressure of the spare tire If you have a compact spare tire it should
228. nd release the 4HI switch This can be done at any speed and the front axle will lock automatically Shifting from 4HI to 2HI Press and release the 2HI switch This can be done at any speed and the front axle will unlock automatically Shifting from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal engaged in vehicles equipped with a manual transmission The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4LO switch You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4LO indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph 4 8 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N or the clutch pedal engaged On automatic transmission equipped vehicles if your transfer case does not shift into 4LO your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment With your transmission in NEUTRAL N press and release the 4LO switch While the 4LO indicator light is flashing shift your transmission into PARK P Wait until the 4LO indicator light remains i
229. nd the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation FWD 6 Press this button to rapidly forward the tape to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again The radio will play the last selected station while forwarding the tape The tape direction arrow will blink during the forward operation AM FM Press this button to switch from a tape to the radio TAPE AUX Press this button to return to the tape player when playing the radio The lighted arrow will appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in the active mode EJECT Press this button to remove the tape The radio will now play EJECT can be used with either the ignition or radio off To load a cassette tape with the ignition or radio off press EJECT before loading the cassette CLN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player To activate the bypass feature use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition to
230. ndex for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 9 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 9 000 Miles 15 000 km a ooo Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 12 000 Miles 20 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 10 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whi
231. ndow almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes Recreational Vehicle Towing Your vehicle should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground Your transmission has no provision for internal lubrication while being towed To properly tow your vehicle it should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground Towing with all four wheels on the ground should be avoided In rare cases when it s unavoidable and your vehicle must be towed with all four wheels on the ground the propeller shaft to axle yoke orientation should be marked and the propeller shaft removed following the applicable service manual removal installation procedure See Service and Owner Publications in the Index 4 39 Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission through the opening created by removing the propeller shaft if proper protection is not provided Also check the transmission fluid level before driving the vehicle When towing your vehicle turn the ignition to OFF To prevent your battery from draining while towing remove the RDO BATT and CLSTR fuses from the instrument panel fuse block Be sure to replace the fuse when you reach y
232. ne factor you can control Suppose you re steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down 4 9 Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you ll want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you can t there isn t room That s the time for evasive action steering around the problem
233. ne or other parts could be damaged Damage to your engine or vehicle caused by operating the engine in the shaded area isn t covered by your vehicle warranty Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with your vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Safety Belt R
234. ned and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle These schedules are for vehicles that carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on your vehicle s Certification Tire label See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits are driven off road in the recommended manner See Off Road Driving With Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle in the Index use the recommended fuel See Fuel in the Index Selecting the Right Schedule First you ll need to decide which of the two schedules is right for your vehicle Here s how to decide which schedule to follow Scheduled Maintenance Short Trip City Definition Follow the Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance if any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles 8 to 16 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic Your vehicle has the 2200 L4 Code 5 flexible fuel engine and you have used ethanol fuel 85 Ethanol E 85 You operate your v
235. ng options as many are it s ready for heavier trailers But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points If you have the 2200 L4 Code 5 engine use regular gasoline without ethanol when pulling a trailer See Fuel in the Index There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control if your trailer will Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads If you have an automat
236. no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free ACDelco battery When it s time for a new battery get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label We recommend an ACDelco battery See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for battery location WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling 6 37 Vehicle Storage Bulb Replacement If you re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days Before you replace any bulbs be sure that all the lamps or more remove the black negative cable from are off and the engine isn t running See Replacement the battery This will help keep your battery from Bulbs in the Index ing down aii AR a For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your GM dealer s service department Halogen Bulbs Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you aren t careful See Jump Starting in the Index for tips on wor
237. nol content is greater than 85 Your vehicle may not operate properly if the ethanol content is greater than 85 At a minimum E 85 should meet ASTM D 5798 specifications To insure quick starts in the wintertime the E 85 fuel must be formulated properly for your climate according to ASTM specification D 5798 If you have trouble starting on E 85 it may be because your E 85 fuel is not properly formulated for your climate If this happens switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to your fuel tank may improve starting Mixing gasoline and E 85 in your fuel tank will not cause any problems with your vehicle For good starting and heater efficiency below 32 F 0 C the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain a maximum of 50 ethanol E 85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline so you ll need to refill your fuel tank more often when using E 85 than when you re using gasoline Use regular gasoline when pulling a trailer For payload capacity with ethanol fuel see Loading Your Vehicle in the Index NOTICE Some additives are not compatible with E 85 fuel and may harm your fuel system Damage caused by additives may not be covered by your new vehicle warranty Don t use additives with E 85 fuel NOTICE Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Don t use it It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage wouldn t be covered und
238. not sound when it should but the vehicle s headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle s headlamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by an authorized service center 2 17 Passlock Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock theft deterrent system Passlock is a passive theft deterrent system Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a valid key If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with fuel is disabled During normal operation the SECURITY light will go off approximately five seconds after the key is turned to RUN If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before trying to restart the engine Remember to release the key from START as soon as the engine starts If the engine does not start after three tries the vehicle needs service If the engine is running and the SECURITY message comes on you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine off However your Passlock system is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time You may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index See your dealer for service In an emergency call
239. ns don t let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right front passenger s position for example don t secure a rear facing child restraint in your vehicle until you have your vehicle serviced See Air Bag Off Switch in the Index 1 52 You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Your vehicle has a right front passenger s air bag If your vehicle is a regular cab pickup or an extended cab pickup and you are using a rear facing child restraint in this seat make sure the air bag is turned off See Air Bag Off Switch in the Index On all models if your child restraint is forward facing always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing it in this seat See Seats in the Index Put the restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of position
240. ns seven AM seven FM1 and seven FM2 Just 1 Turn the radio on Press AM FM to select the band Tune in the desired station Press SET SET will appear on the display AR WN Press one of the four pushbuttons within five seconds Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton In addition to the four stations already set up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time Just 1 Tune in the desired station 2 Press SET SET will appear on the display 3 Press two adjoining buttons at the same time within five seconds Whenever you press the same two buttons the station you set will return 4 Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons P SCAN Select either AM FM1 or FM2 mode and press both SEEK buttons to scan through each of your preset stations The system will scan through and play each preset station stored on your pushbuttons for a few seconds Press either SEEK button or RECALL to stop scanning through the preset stations Setting the Tone BASS Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease bass TREB Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble 3 10 Adjusting the Speakers BAL Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle p
241. nt so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints 1 40 The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child for whom the safety belts are designed A young child s hip bones are still so small that vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that s unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints Restraint Systems for Children An infant car bed A a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface Make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle A rear facing infant seat B provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant The harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint 1 41 A forward facing child seat C E provides restraint for the child s body with the harness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T shaped or shelf like shields 1 42 A booster seat F G is a child re
242. nths whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 72 000 Miles 120 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 22 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote For Two Wheel Drive vehicles only Clean and repack the front wheel bearings or at each brake relining whichever occurs first Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain
243. ntration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things The amount of alcohol consumed The drinker s body weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association a 180 1b 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of a liquor like whiskey gin or vodka It s the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men 4 4 Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks The law in many U S states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0 10 percent In a growing number of U S states and throughout Canada the limit is 0 08 percent In some other countries it s even lower The BAC limit for al
244. o know which restraint systems your vehicle has We ll start with the driver position Driver Position This part describes the driver s restraint system Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here s how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 3 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 5 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulde
245. o one of the preset settings of CLASSIC NEWS ROCK POP C W Country Western or JAZZ To return to the manual mode press and release this button until the AUTO TONE display goes blank This will return the tone adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls If a BASS or TREB control is turned the AUTO TONE display will go blank Use PUSHBUTTONS to program AUTO TONE Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them 3 13 Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player To load a cassette tape with the ignition off press EJECT or RECALL Then insert the cassette tape If the ignition is on but the radio is off the tape will begin playing Once the tape is playing use the VOL AUTO TONE BAL FADE BASS and TREB controls just as
246. ock Brakes ABS Your vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine and begin to drive away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on This is normal If there s a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index Here s how anti lock works Let s say the road is wet You re driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here s what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember Anti lock doesn t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you won t have time to apply your b
247. ocks your ignition steering wheel and transmission It s a theft deterrent feature You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK On manual transmission vehicles turning the key to LOCK will lock the steering column and result in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle This could cause a collision If you need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving turn the key only to OFF Don t press the key release button while the vehicle is moving 2 19 NOTICE If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can t turn it be sure you are using the correct key if so is it all the way in If it is then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard But turn the key only with your hand Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch If none of this works then your vehicle needs service OFF C This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off for example if your vehicle is being towed RUN D This is the position for driving START E This position starts your engine 2 20 Key Release Button The key cannot be removed from the ignition of manual transmission vehicles unless the key release button is used To remove the key on manual transmission vehicles turn the key to OFF Then turn the key to LOCK while pressing the key rele
248. of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision So here are some tips for passing Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it s all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic 4 11 Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you re awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you re following a larger vehicle Also you won t have adequ
249. of the vehicle when storing it 5 19 Insert the chisel end of the wheel wrench on an angle into the hole in the rear bumper Be sure the chisel end of the wheel wrench connects into the hoist shaft Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire Keep turning the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle When the tire has been completely lowered tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening Pull the tire out from under the vehicle 5 20 NOTICE To help avoid vehicle damage do not drive the vehicle before the cable is restored Put the spare tire near the flat tire The tools you ll be using include the jack A and wheel wrench B Your vehicle may also have an optional hub cap removal tool Position the bent end of your hub cap removal tool shown or the chisel end of your wheel wrench in the notch of the hub cap and pry off the hub cap Some of the molded plastic hub caps have imitation wheel nuts molded into them The wheel wrench won t fit these imitation nuts so don t try to remove them with the socket end of the wheel wrench If you have individual wheel nut caps that cover each nut they must be removed in order to get to the wheel nuts Use the socket end of the wheel wrench to remove the wheel nut caps Your wheel nut caps may attach your hub cap to the wheel Remove these wheel nut caps bef
250. on Fluid When to Check A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed However the fluid in your manual transmission doesn t require changing How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at your GM dealership service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading NOTICE Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Check the fluid level only when your engine is off the vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transmission case Then follow these steps 1 Remove the filler plug 2 Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of the filler plug hole 3 If the fluid level is good install the plug and be sure it is fully seated If the fluid level is low add more fluid as described in the next steps 6 23 How to Add Fluid Here s how to add fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 1 Remove the filler plug 2 Add fluid at the filler plug hole Add only enough fluid to bring the flui
251. onday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM EST information within 30 days of delivery On returns a re stocking fee may be applied FAX Orders Only 1 313 865 5927 against the original order PUBLICATION FORM VEHICLE MODEL PRICE TOTAL ITEM DESCRIPTION NAME YEAR QTY PRICE Car amp Light Truck Transmission Unit Repair Owner s Manual In Portfolio Owner s Manual Without Portfolio NOTE Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name and also the Check or Money name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent Order payable to Michigan Purchasers Mail completed order form to Helm Inc USA funds add 6 sales tax HELM INCORPORATED e P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 only do not send cash k For purchases outside U S A please write to the above address for quotation C U S Order Processing 6 00 C MasterCard 7 canaaan posia me a vsa anano Toa CUSTOMER S NAME ATTENTION m R iscover ae Account STREET ADDRESS NO P O BOX NUMBERS Number ary Check here if your billing address Expiration Ho go is different from your shipping Date mo yr address shown CUSTOMER SIGNATURE CITY STATE ZIP CODE DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO AREA CODE GM GMC ORD99 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents obligation Allow ample time for delivery are to make checks payable in U S
252. ons and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this GM will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first This applies only to materials manufactured and sold by General Motors Bodies body conversions or equipment not made or sold by General Motors are not covered 6 61 GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 1052918 8 oz 0 237 L or All Protectant Protects leather wood acrylics Plexiglas plastic rubber and vinyl 1052925 16 oz 0 473 L Multi Purpose Cleans carpets seats interior trim door panels Interior Cleaner and floor mats See your General Motors Parts Department for these products For exterior use only See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Not recommended for use on instrument panels 6 62 Vehicle Identification Number VIN at SAMPLE4UX1M072675 au ea ASSEMBLY CODE MODEL YEAR PLANT This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The 8th character in
253. onths whichever occurs first ooo i See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 39 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote For Two Wheel Drive vehicles only Clean and repack the front wheel bearings or at each brake relining whichever occurs first Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km 7 40 Long Tr
254. oor armrest Press LOCK to activate this feature Press NORM and the windows will return to normal operation Swing Out Windows Extended Cab To open a rear swing out window pull the latch toward the front of the vehicle and then push the latch out and rearward When you close the window be sure the latch engages Sliding Rear Window If Equipped Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons A child or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Don t leave the keys in a vehicle with children Squeeze the latch in the center of the window and slide the glass to open it When you close the window be sure the latch is engaged This vehicle has one double sided key for the ignition and door locks It will fit with either side up When a new vehicle is delivered the dealer provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key code number The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys Keep this number in a safe place If you lose your keys you ll be able to have new ones made easily using this number Your dealer should also have this number Door Locks NOTICE Your vehicle has a number of features that can help prevent theft But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside You
255. or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call 1 800 268 6800 for emergency services Courtesy Transportation GMC has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required This will reduce your inconvenience during watranty repairs Plan Ahead When Possible When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership let them know this
256. or leakage Replace seals if necessary 7 48 Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system Inspect the body near the exhaust system Look for broken damaged missing or out of position parts as well as open seams holes loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle See Engine Exhaust in the Index Engine Cooling System Inspection Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace as needed Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year Throttle System Inspection Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts Replace parts as needed Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables Transfer Case and Front Axle Four Wheel Drive Inspection Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary A fluid loss could indicate a problem check and have it repaired if needed Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation More frequent lubrication may be required on off road use Brake System Ins
257. or opener activation button over the console door button and press the opener firmly into place The pegs inside the compartment door are used to make sure the button on the compartment door will contact the control button on the garage door opener Add one peg at a time until the garage door opener operates with the compartment door closed when you press the button Now with the compartment door closed press the button again to make sure the garage door opener operates properly With the garage door opener positioned properly and the right number of pegs in place you should only have to press the button slightly to operate the opener Adjust the position of the garage door opener and add or remove pegs as needed until the opener operates properly 2 55 Temperature and Compass Display The outside air temperature and the compass are displayed at the front of the overhead console The control buttons are located to the left of the display Turn the display on or off by pressing the ON OFF button Display the temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit English or Celsius metric by pressing the US MET button 2 56 Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle the temperature indicated will be the last outside temperature recorded with the ignition on If the outside temperature is 37 F 3 C or lower when you turn on the ignition ICE will appear on the display This is a warning to the driver th
258. ore you take off the hub cap Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire A Front Frame Hole B Rear Frame Hole ZR2 1 Using the wheel wrench loosen all the wheel nuts C Spring Hanger Hole Standard Pickups Don t remove them yet 2 Turn the jack handle clockwise slightly to raise the jack lift head 3 Fit the jack into the appropriate hole nearest the flat tire 5 22 Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire 5 23 6 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident 7 Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface 8 Put the nuts on by hand Make sure the cone shaped end is toward the wheel Rust o
259. ormance Criteria Specification TPC Spec number on each tire s sidewall When you get new tires get ones with that same TPC Spec number That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance handling speed rating traction ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle If your tires have an all season tread design the TPC number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type bias bias belted or radial as your original tires 6 50 Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels It s all right to drive with your compact spare if you have one It was developed for use on your vehicle If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shou
260. osition balances the sound between the speakers FADE Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player Once the tape is playing use the knobs for VOLUME BAL FADE BASS and TREB just as you do for the radio REV Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the cassette tape Press the SEEK right arrow to stop reversing the tape FWD Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the cassette tape Press the SEEK left arrow to stop forwarding the tape RECALL Press this knob to switch tape sides EJECT Press this button to remove the tape or stop the tape and play the radio CLN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player
261. ot locked there will be a small current drain on your battery which could discharge your battery over a period of time If you need to leave your key in the ignition in OFF for an extended period it is recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from the battery to prevent discharging your battery PARK P This position locks your rear wheels It s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can t move easily It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK P before starting the engine Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition key is in RUN If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever push the shift lever all the way into PARK P as you maintain brake application Th
262. our destination See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for recreational vehicle towing Follow the instructions for the towing equipment 4 40 Loading Your Vehicle GAWR FRT COLD TIRE PRESSURE The Certification Tire label is found on the driver s door edge above the door latch The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel cargo and trailer tongue weight if pulling a trailer The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs and payloads Please note the Certification Tire label on your truck or consult your dealer for additional details In the case of a sudden stop or collision things carried in the bed of your truck could shift fo
263. ow If you have an automatic transmission and you apply your brakes the cruise control will shut off If you have a manual transmission and you apply your brakes or push the clutch pedal the cruise control will shut off 2 42 Cruise control can be dangerous where you can t drive safely at a steady speed So don t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning and you could lose control Don t use cruise control on slippery roads Setting Cruise Control If you leave your cruise control switch on when you re not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don t want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control 1 Move the cruise control switch to ON 2 Get up to the speed you want 3 Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This of course shuts off cruise control But you don t need to reset it Once you re going about 25 mph 40 km h or more you can move the cruise control switch from ON to R A briefly You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there
264. ow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle See the earlier Caution under Engine Exhaust Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park ina garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Blizzard in the Index 2 37 It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you ve left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won t move See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Locking Rear Axle If your vehicle has this feature your locking rear axle can give you additional traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle 2 38 Horn Pr
265. p stoves and lanterns Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system 4 15 Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route You are much less likely to get bad surprises Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads It s also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle If something happens to one of them the other can help quickly Does your vehicle have a winch If so be sure to read the winch instructions In a remote area a winch can be handy if you get stuck But you want to know how to use it properly Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It s a good idea to practice in an area that s safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off road driving does require some new and different driving skills Here s what we mean Tune your senses to different kinds of signals Your eyes for example need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds With your arms hands feet and body you Il need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce 4 16 Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed Here are some
266. paired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn t being used at the time of the collision If an air bag inflates you ll need to replace air bag system parts See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle and information on starting shifting and braking Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly and what to do if you have a problem SO NO Windows Keys Door Locks Remote Keyless Entry System If Equipped Tailgate Theft Content Theft Deterrent If Equipped Passlock New Vehicle Break In Ignition Positions Starting Your Engine Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped Automatic Transmission Operation Manual Transmission Operation Four Wheel Drive If Equipped Parking Brake Shifting Into PARK P Automatic Transmission Only 2 35 Shifting Out of PARK P Automatic Transmission Only Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While You re Parked Automatic Transmission Locking Rear Axle Tilt Wheel If Equipped Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Exterior Lamps Interior Lamps Mirrors Storage Compartments Accessory Power Outlets If Equipped Instrument Panel Your Information System Instrument Panel Cluster Warning Lights Gages and
267. passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again 1 20 Air Bag System This part explains the air bag system Your vehicle has air bags one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating air bag But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren t wearing your safety belt even if you have air bags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Air bags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts All air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don t replace them Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something They aren t designed to inflate at all in rollover rear side or low speed frontal crashes And for unrestrained occupants air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provid
268. pection Inspect the complete system Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Also inspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks Inspect other brake parts including drums wheel cylinders calipers parking brake etc Check parking brake adjustment You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking 7 49 Part D Recommended Fluids USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT and Lubricants Hydraulic Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid NOTE Fluids and lubricants identified below by name Brake System GM Part No 12377967 or part number or specification may be obtained from equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid your dealer Windshield GM Optikleen Washer Solvent USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Washer Solvent GM Part No 1051515 or equivalent Engine Oil Engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Hydraulic Hydraulic Clutch Fluid GM Part Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Clutch System No 12345347 or equivalent of the proper viscosity To DOT 3 brake fluid determine the preferred viscosity Power GM Power Steering Fluid for your vehicle s engine see Steering System GM Part No 1052884 1 pint Engine Oil in the Index 1050017 1 quart or equivalent Engine Coolant 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable Manual Synchromesh Transmission Fluid wa
269. play when the road gets smoother The disc is upside down It is dirty scratched or wet It is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again The disc player is very hot Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display PREV 1 Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previous selection If you hold this button or press it more than once the disc will advance further Sound is muted in this mode RDM 2 Press this button to play the tracks on the disc in random order While in the RDM mode RANDOM appears on the display Press RDM again to return to normal play NEXT 3 Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection If you hold this button or press it more than once the disc will advance further The next track number will appear on the display Sound is muted in this mode REV 4 Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a favorite passage You will hear the disc selection play at high speed while you press the REV button This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired selection Release REV to resume playing FWD 6 Press and hold this button to advance rapidly within a track You will hear the disc selection play at high speed while you press the FWD button This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired selection Release FWD to resume playing RECALL Press this button to see what track is playing Press it again within fiv
270. pped Your Driving and the Road Defensive Driving Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions Drunken Driving Off Road Driving Control of a Vehicle Recreational Vehicle Towing Braking Loading Your Vehicle Steering Towing a Trailer Problems on the Road Hazard Warning Flashers Engine Overheating J ump Starting Changing a Flat Tire Towing Your Vehicle If You re Stuck iii iv Section 6 Table of Contents cont d Fuel Checking Fluids and Lubricants Engine Air Cleaner Filter Brakes Bulb Replacement Service and Appearance Care Tires and Wheels Appearance Care Electrical System Capacities and Specifications Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Scheduled Maintenance Owner Checks and Services Periodic Maintenance Inspections Maintenance Schedule Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Maintenance Records Table of Contents cont d Customer Assistance Information Customer Satisfaction Procedures Warranty Information See Warranty Manual Customer Assistance Offices Reporting Safety Defects on page 8 10 Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation Service Publications Please refer to the last page of this manual for your Service Station Guide GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem GMC the GMC Emblem and the name SONOMA are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation
271. r Remember the theft deterrent system won t activate if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door lock It activates only if you use a power door lock switch with the door open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off Here s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident If you don t want to activate the theft deterrent system the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote keyless entry transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm If you set off the alarm by accident unlock any door with the key You can also turn off the alarm by pressing UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter The alarm won t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way Testing the Alarm The alarm can be tested by following these steps 1 From inside the vehicle lower the driver s window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the SECURITY light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm If the alarm does
272. r Seat Crew Cab To tilt the rear seat forward pull forward on the lever located at the base of the seatback Safety Belts They re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts And it explains the air bag system Don t let anyone ride where he or she can t wear a safety belt properly If you are in a crash and you re not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up See Safety Belt Reminder Light in the Index In most states and Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here s why They work You never know if you ll be in a crash If you do have a crash you don t know if it will be a ba
273. r and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces Ss 3 The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor 1 14 Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body A 4 The shoulder belt is too loose It won t give nearly as much protection this way 1 15 Q What s wrong with this The belt is buckled in the wrong place 1 16 You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which aren t as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen
274. r dealer s service department or another qualified service center should perform Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants lists some recommended products necessary to help keep your vehicle properly maintained These products or their equivalents should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done Part E Maintenance Record is a place for you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on your vehicle Keep your maintenance receipts They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we don t know exactly how you ll drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your dealer This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them If you go to your dealer for your service needs you ll know that GM trai
275. r dirt on the wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held dirt off against the hub If a nut can t be turned by hand use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon as possible 5 24 Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 Ib ft 140 N m 9 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise Lower the jack completely 10 Use the wrench to NOTICE tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to crisscross sequence brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid as shown expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification 5 25 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Follow this diagram
276. r wet pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle s drivetrain If your vehicle has four wheel drive and is equipped with a manual transmission disregard the SHIFT light when the transfer case is in 4LO 2 29 Electronic Transfer Case The electronic transfer case switches are located to the right of the steering wheel Use these switches to shift into and out of four wheel drive You can choose among three driving settings 2HI This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations Your front axle is not engaged in two wheel drive When this lamp is lit it is about one half as bright as the others 4HI This setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle Use 4HI when you need extra traction such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations 2 30 4LO This setting also engages your front axle to give you extra traction You may never need 4LO It sends the maximum power to all four wheels You might choose 4LO if you were driving off road in sand mud or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting you are in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on If the lights do not come on you should take your vehicle in for service An indicator light will flash while shifting It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed Shifting from 2HI to 4HI Press a
277. radio functions whenever battery power is removed The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored If ignored the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature If THEFTLOCK is activated your radio will not operate if stolen When THEFTLOCK is activated the radio will display LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power has been interrupted If your battery loses power for any reason you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate Activating the Theft Deterrent Feature The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4 3 22 Write down any three or four digit number from 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN 3 Turn the radio off Press the 1 and 4 buttons together Hold them down until shows on the display Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down 5 Press MN and 000 will appear on the display 6 Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code Press AM FM after you
278. rakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock Don t pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some noise but this is normal Braking in Emergencies With anti lock you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Steering Tips Driving on Curves It s important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here s why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there s no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you ll understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you re in a curve speed is the o
279. ransmission between FIRST 1 or SECOND 2 and REVERSE R spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that doesn t get you out after a few tries you may need to be towed out Or you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has them If you do need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle in the Index Using the Recovery Hooks Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle You may need to use them if you re stuck off road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving 5 31 5 32 The recovery hooks when used are under a lot of force Always pull the vehicle straight out Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back NOTICE Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle This section begins with service and fuel information and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels There is
280. re Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other the alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your wheels may need to be rebalanced Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be inj
281. re will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty 6 28 NOTICE If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost wouldn t be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system NOTICE If you use the proper coolant you don t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system These can be harmful Checking Coolant See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at ADD or a little higher When your engine is warm the level should be up to FULL HOT or a little higher 6 29 Addin
282. ree seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in 3 4 of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it s pavement or gravel the condition of the road wet dry icy tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you re driving brake normally but don t pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Anti L
283. reo with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped Remote Cassette Tape Player If Equipped Theft Deterrent Feature If Equipped Understanding Radio Reception Tips About Your Audio System Care of Your Cassette Tape Player Care of Your Compact Discs Care of Your Compact Disc Player Fixed Mast Antenna Comfort Controls With these systems you can control the heating cooling and ventilation in your vehicle Standard Climate Control System Fan Control The knob on the left side of the heating system control panel controls the fan speed To increase airflow turn the knob clockwise To decrease airflow turn it counterclockwise 3 2 Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area of your vehicle Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer air Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air Mode Knob The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery OFF This setting turns the system off Some outside air will still enter the vehicle whenever the vehicle is moving forward If the air entering your vehicle is warmer than desired turn the temperature knob fully counterclockwise and turn the mode knob to VENT gt o A VENT Th
284. return to the manual mode press and release this button until the AUTO TONE display goes blank This will return the tone adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls If a BASS or TREB control is turned the AUTO TONE display will go blank Use PUSHBUTTONS to program AUTO TONE 3 18 Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Compact Disc PWR Press this knob to turn the system on You can also turn the system on when you insert a compact disc into the player with the ignition on Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in Wait a few seconds and the disc should play CD and a CD symbol will also appear on the display Anytime you are playing a CD the letters CD will be next to the CD symbol If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the display it could be that You are driving on a very rough road The disc should
285. return to the reclined position If the seatback isn t locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked Easy Entry Seat Extended Cab Models The right front bucket or split bench seat of your vehicle makes it easy to get in and out of the rear vehicle area e Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and the whole seat will slide forward Move the seatback to its original position after someone gets into the rear seat area Then move the seat rearward until it locks If an easy entry right front seat isn t locked it can move In a sudden stop or crash the person sitting there could be injured After you ve used it be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat to be sure it is locked Tilt the seatback completely forward again to get out Jump Seat Extended Cab Models Your extended cab pickup has a jump seat in the rear area To fold the jump seat down pull down on the pull tab on the bottom of the seat until the seat is in place then move the seatback to a vertical position To store the seat fold the seatback down on the cushion then push the entire seat up until it is flush with the trim panel Don t let the safety belts be damaged by the hinges or the latches Safety belts should be folded and stored between the seat cushion and seatback Rea
286. ror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with heated outside rearview mirrors When you operate the heated mirror button on O your climate control system the defogger will warm the mirrors to help clear them of snow or condensation Storage Compartments Glove Box To open your glove box lift the lever on the front of the glove box and lower the door The glove box should not be open while driving Overhead Console Crew Cab If Equipped The overhead console includes reading lamps a compartment for a garage door opener a temperature and compass display and a storage compartment for sunglasses Some models have a driver information system in the console See Driver Information System later in this section 2 53 Reading Lamps Press the button near each lamp to turn the reading lamps on and off The lamps can also be swiveled to point in the desired direction Installing a Garage Door Opener If you have a garage door opener the front overhead compartment can be used to conveniently store the opener 2 54 To install the garage door opener first open the compartment door by pressing the latch forward Peel the protective backing from the hook and loop patch Press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener as close to the center of the opener as possible Center the garage do
287. rs reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline 8 10 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors o
288. rst An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 34 Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rot
289. rument panel lights The radio lights will also dim Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top of the instrument panel under the radio speaker grill Be sure it is not covered or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on your headlamps when driving through a parking garage heavy overcast weather or a tunnel This is normal There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay 2 45 To idle an automatic transmission vehicle with the DRL off put the transmission in PARK P To idle a manual transmission vehicle with the DRL off set the parking brake The DRL will stay off until you shift out of PARK P or release the parking brake As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it You may be able to turn off your Automatic Headlamp System See Daytime Running Lamps DRL later in this section for more information Lamps On Reminder A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition is in OFF LOCK or ACCESSORY To turn the chime off turn the headlamp knob al
290. rward and come into the passenger area injuring you and others If you put things in the bed of your truck you should make sure they are properly secured Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or either the maximum front or rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way NOTICE Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they ll keep going 4 41 Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Don t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can There s also important loading information for off road driving
291. s If everything checks out this far then make the brake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends fluid to the rear brakes But don t use copper tubing for this If you do it will bend and finally break off Use steel brake tubing 4 51 Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check the trailer hitch and platform and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working 4 52 Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re tow
292. s you can plug in auxiliary electrical equipment The accessory power outlets are located near the center of the vehicle on the lower part of the instrument panel Just remove the plug from the outlet and follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment you install These circuits are protected by a fuse and have maximum current levels Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to the power accessory outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on the power accessory plugs NOTICE When using the accessory power outlets maximum electrical load must not exceed 20 amps Always turn off any electrical equipment when not in use Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain your battery 2 61 OnStar System If Equipped OnStar is a vehicle communications system that offers a variety of services and provides a hands free communication link between you and the OnStar Center A service subscription agreement and fee are required in order to receive OnStar service Services are available 24 hours a day 7 days a week For more information call 1 888 ONSTAR 7 1 888 667 8277 OnStar Services Button Press this button once to contact an advisor who will be able to assist you with these services If you are not quickly connected the system will automatically reset and redia
293. s for leaking See footnote Continued 7 31 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Continued Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 22 500 Miles 37 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 32 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 30 000 Miles 50 000 km C
294. s that some owners ask about None of these show a problem with your fuel gage At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads full It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up The gage doesn t go back to empty when you turn off the ignition Low Fuel Light This light comes on briefly when you start your engine LOW FUEL This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel To turn it off add fuel to the fuel tank See Fuel in the Index 2 81 Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems In this section you ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle WW WW WW WW Wd DNNDANNABRWN LD T fon P Comfort Controls Standard Climate Control System Optional Climate Control System Air Conditioning If Equipped Heating Defogging and Defrosting Ventilation System Audio Systems Setting the Clock for Systems with SET Button Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and MN Buttons AM FM Stereo 3 9 3 16 DANDDNKKNO WW WW WWW W NNNNNNNY WY AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player If Equipped AM FM Ste
295. se Your radio may display CLN to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer If this message appears on the display your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player If you notice a reduction in sound quality try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality clean the tape player The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealer GM Part No 12344789 When using a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette it is normal for the cassette to eject because your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected use the following steps If your vehicle is equipped with the AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY Turn the radio on BN Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette Within five seconds press and hold the REV and FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds The tape symbol on the display will f
296. some of your own service work you ll want to use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record in the Index You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work ona vehicle without knowing enough about it Besure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel Gasoline The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number VIN shows the code letter for your engine You will find th
297. ssion Service normal conditions Long Trip Highway Intervals Every 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection Every 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Fuel Filter Replacement 2200 L4 engine only Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark Plug Replacement 4 3L V6 Engine Only Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV Valve Inspection Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first These intervals only summarize maintenance services Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages 7 7 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be performed after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be performed at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded 7 8 Lubrica
298. ssion control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness see your dealer or qualified service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection Oil Pressure Gage United States Canada The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate oil pressure in kPa kilopascals Don t keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing low oil pressure 2 79 Security Light This light will come on briefly wh
299. straint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner and some high back booster seats have a five point harness A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window Q How do child restraints work A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain seat or position children A built in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle An add on child restraint system is a portable one which is purchased by the vehicle s owner For many years add on child restraints have used the adult belt system in the vehicle To help reduce the chance of injury the child also has to be secured within the restraint The vehicle s belt system secures the add on child restraint in the vehicle and the add on child restraint s harness system holds the child in place within the restraint One system the three point harness has straps that come down over each of the infant s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch The five point harness system has two shoulder straps two hip straps and a crotch strap A shield may take the place of hip straps A T shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child s body A shelf or armrest type shield has straps that are attached to a wide shelf like shield that swings up or to the side When choosing a child restra
300. such things as catsup coffee black egg fruit fruit juice milk soft drinks vomit urine and blood can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain then sponge the soiled area with cool water 2 Ifa stain remains follow the Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner instructions described earlier 3 If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine treat the area with a water baking soda solution 1 teaspoon 5 ml of baking soda to 1 cup 250 ml of lukewarm water 4 Let dry Stains caused by candy ice cream mayonnaise chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain 2 First clean with cool water and allow to dry completely 3 Ifa stain remains follow instructions for Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth Rub with aclean damp cloth to remove dirt You may have to do it more than once Things like tar asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don t get them off quickly Use a clean cloth and a vinyl leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth Then let the leather dry naturally Do not use heat to dry For stubborn stains use a leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Never use oils varnishes solvent based or abrasive cleaners furniture polish or shoe po
301. sure the trailer bulbs are still working 4 53 Driving On Grades Parking on Hills Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well a You really should not park your vehicle with a If you have an automatic transmission you should use THIRD 3 when towing a trailer Operating your vehicle in THIRD 3 when towing a trailer will minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your transmission Or if you have a manual transmission it s better not to use FIFTH 5 Just drive in FOURTH 4 trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged or as you need to a lower gear But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades how to do it consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a 1 Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into lower temperature than at normal altitudes If you turn PARK P yet or into gear for a manual your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude transmission When parking uphill turn your wheels on steep uphill grades your vehicle may show signs away from the curb When parking downhill turn similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the your whee
302. surfaces may damage the transmitter To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter 1 Insert a thin coin in the slot between the covers of the transmitter housing near the key ring hole Remove the bottom by twisting the coin 2 Remove and replace the battery with a three volt CR2032 or equivalent battery positive side up 3 Align the covers and snap them together 4 Resynchronize the transmitter 5 Check the operation of the transmitter Resynchronization Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security method used by this system The transmitter does not send the same signal twice to the receiver The receiver will not respond to a signal it has been sent previously This prevents anyone from recording and playing back the signal from the transmitter To resynchronize your transmitter stand close to your vehicle and press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter at the same time for seven seconds The door locks should cycle to confirm synchronization If the locks do not cycle see your dealer for service 2 13 Third Door Extended Cab If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a side access panel for convenience in loading and unloading cargo To open the side access panel first open the driver s front door Then use the handle located on the front edge of the door panel to open it You must close the side access panel before you can close the driver s
303. t There could be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert 4 19 Q What should I do if my vehicle stalls or is about to stall and I can t make it up the hill If this happens there are some things you should do and there are some things you must not do First here s what you should do Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards Also apply the parking brake If your engine is still running shift the transmission to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE R If your engine has stopped running you ll need to restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to PARK P or shift to NEUTRAL N if your vehicle has a manual transmission and restart the engine Then shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE R 4 20 As you are backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position This way you ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down It s best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibi
304. t of the vehicle until it cools down You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away Cooling System When you decide it s safe to lift the hood here s what you ll see A Coolant Recovery Tank B Radiator Pressure Cap C Engine Cooling Fan If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling don t do anything else until it cools down 5 10 When the engine is cold the coolant level should be at least up to the ADD mark If it isn t you may have a leak in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty NOTICE If there seems to be no leak start the engine again See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down If it doesn t your vehicle needs service Turn off the engine Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Don t touch them If you do you can be burned Don t run the engine if th
305. tance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 0 1 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle hand controls wheelchair scooter lifts etc This program can also provide you with free resource information such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details When calling from outside Canada please dial 1 905 644 3063 All TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 8 5 Roadside Assistance GMC s Roadside Assistance provides stranded owners with over the phone roadside repairs location of the nearest GMC dealer or the following special services Flat Tire Change Installation of spare tire will be covered at no charge customer is responsible for repair or replacement of tire Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the customer to get to the nearest service station up to 5 00 will be covered
306. te the front suspension ball joints steering linkage parking brake cable guides propshaft splines universal joints and brake pedal springs A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule Drive axle service See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for proper lubricant to use Check fluid level and add fluid as needed If driving in dusty areas or when towing a trailer drain fluid and refill every 15 000 miles 25 000 km If your vehicle has a locking differential drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change More frequent lubrication may be required for heavy duty or off road use Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 3 000 Miles 5 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the I
307. teranduseonlyGM Transmission GM Part No 12345349 Goodwrench DEX COOL or with V6 Engine or equivalent Havoline DEX COOL e Coolant See Engine Coolant in Manual Friction Modified Synchromesh the Index Transmission Transmission Fluid with L4 Engine GM Part No 12377916 7 50 USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Automatic DEXRON III Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Rear Axle Axle Lubricant use only GM Locking Part No 1052271 Do not add Differential friction modifier Key Lock Cylinders Chassis Lubrication Front Wheel Bearings Front and Rear Axle Standard Differential Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent Chassis Lubricant GM Part No 12377985 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Wheel bearing lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category GC or GC LB GM Part No 1051344 or equivalent SAE 80W 90 Axle Lubricant GM Part No 1052271 or equivalent Automatic AUTO TRAK II Fluid Transfer Case GM Part No 12378508 Transfer Case Shift Lever Rear Driveline Center Spline and Universal Joints Constant Velocity Universal Joint Chassis Lubricant GM Part No 12377985 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Chassis Lubricant GM Part No 12377985 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI
308. th boulders trees logs or ruts What s beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you don t know It s the smart way to find out Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion Driving Uphill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill you need to take some special steps Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed Don t use more power than you need because you don t want your wheels to start spinning or sliding Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sideways and possibly roll over You could be seriously injured or killed When driving up hills always try to go straight up Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you re there Use your headlamps even during the day They make you more visible to oncoming traffic Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed can cause an acciden
309. th the keyless entry transmitter You can also turn the lamps on and off by pressing the switch near each lamp Dome Lamps The dome lamps will come on when you open any door You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the thumbwheel located next to the parking headlamps knob all the way up to the second notch In this position the dome lamps will remain on whether a door is opened or closed You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button located below the parking headlamp knob to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when any door is opened or to remain off To turn the lamps off press the button into the in position With the button in this position the dome lamps will remain off when any door is opened To return the lamps to automatic operation press the button again and return it to the out position With the button in this position the dome lamps will come on when you open any door This will override the illuminated entry feature unless you use your keyless entry transmitter if equipped to unlock the vehicle Battery Rundown Protection This feature shuts off the dome courtesy vanity reading glove box cargo and underhood lamps if they are left on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off This will keep your battery from running down If the battery rundown protection shuts off the interior lamps it may be necessary to do one of the following to return it to normal operation Shut off
310. the GM Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance in the Index 2 18 New Vehicle Break In NOTICE Your vehicle doesn t need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t make full throttle starts Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings aren t yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Don t tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer in the Index for more information Ignition Positions Use the key to turn the ignition switch to five different positions ACCESSORY A This position lets you use things like the radio and the windshield wipers and power windows if equipped when the engine is off Push in the key and turn it toward you Your steering wheel will remain locked just as it was before you inserted the key NOTICE Don t operate accessories in the ACCESSORY position for long periods of time Prolonged operation of accessories in the ACCESSORY position could drain your battery and prevent you from starting your vehicle LOCK B This position l
311. the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage Also check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue 4 26 Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively Don t drink and drive e Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you Since you can t see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead In remote areas watch for animals If you re tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver ma
312. their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust If the surface of a disc is soiled dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution and clean it wiping from the center to the edge Be sure never to touch the side without writing when handling discs Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Care of Your Compact Disc Player The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged If the mast should ever become slightly bent you can straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent as it might be by vandals you should replace it Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the fender If tightening is required tighten by hand then with a wrench one quarter turn Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here you ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions We ve also included many other useful tips on driving BHREKRHHERE I eRe RFR ODD Wb Roos 4 26 Defensive Driving Drunken Driving Control of a Vehicle Braking Steering Off Road Recovery Passing Loss of Control Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle Driving at Night 4 28
313. things like this or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It s the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years about 16 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it s against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if the driver plans to drive It s a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Conce
314. things to keep in mind At higher speeds you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles you have less time to react you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles you ll need more distance for braking especially since you re on an unpaved surface When you re driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you re driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear Safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features Here are some things to consider Surface Conditions Off roading can take you over hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the steering acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways Depending upon the kind of surface you are on you may experience slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you re not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Here are some things to consider
315. through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you re going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning doesn t happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning 4 29 Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just isn t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining Driving Through Deep Standing Water NOTICE If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you can t avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly 4 30 Driving Through Flowing Water Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces If you try to drive through flowing water as you might at a low water crossing your vehicle can b
316. tisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure in the Index 1 30 Center Passenger Position Lap Belt If your vehicle is a regular cab or an extended cab with a bench seat someone can sit in the center position If your vehicle is a crew cab model someone can sit in the center rear position When you sit in a center seating position you have a lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 31 Rear Seat Passengers Rear passengers who aren t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others Extended Cab Jump Seats in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts i Lap Belt These are reserve seating positions equipped with lap belts only If your extended cab pickup has the optional side access panel there s only one reserve seating position It s very important for rear seat passeng
317. to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs GMC has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with GMC by dialing 1 800 GMC 8583 462 8583 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices GMC encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a U S customer wishes to write to GMC the letter should be addressed to GMC s Customer Assistance Center United States Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 1 800 GMC 8583 462 8583 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Fax Number 313 381 0022 Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assis
318. to store the underbody mounted spare Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place NOTICE An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should always A Wheel Wrench F Valve Stem be stored under the vehicle with the hoist B Hoist Assembly Pointed Down However storing it that way for an extended G Lower A C Retainer i period could damage the wheel To avoid this H Raise have the wheel repaired as soon as possible D Spring E Tire 5 26 Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear Pull the retainer through the wheel Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench on an angle through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle Continue turning the wheel wrench until the tire is secure and the cable is tight The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened PUSH amp PULL E gt AJ ROTATE TIRE y 5 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If the tire moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable Return the jack wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the proper location behind the seat Secure the items 5 27 A Wheel
319. transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote 7 17 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 48 000 Miles 80 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 50 000 Miles 83 000 km If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Manual transmission fluid doesn t require change 51 000 Miles 85 000 km Change engine oil and filter
320. ts or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 84 000 Miles 140 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 87 000 Miles 145 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY ey 25 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first
321. ue lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P in the Index When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P Shifting Out of PARK P Automatic Transmission Only Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN See Automatic Transmission in the Index If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you want If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can t shift out of PARK P try this 1 Turn the key to OFF Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL N Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want ae ogee ed 5 Have the system fixed as soon as you can 2 35 Parking Your Vehicle Manual Transmission Only Before you get out of your vehicle move the shift lever into REVE
322. um cooling with the least amount of work MAX A C recirculates much of the air inside your vehicle so it cools quickly This setting directs most of the air through the instrument panel vents and a small amount through the floor vents A C This setting cools the air entering your vehicle and directs most of the air through the instrument panel vents and a small amount through the floor vents gt o Vad BI LEVEL A C This setting cools the air entering your vehicle and directs it through the heater floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets gt o 74 VENT This setting directs most of the air through the instrument panel outlets and a small amount through the floor outlets The air conditioning compressor is not working when VENT is selected e tt HEATER This setting directs most of the warmed air through the heater floor outlets and some air through the windshield defroster outlets We Vad BLEND Airflow is divided equally between the heater floor outlet and the windshield defroster outlets Kay DEFROST This setting directs most air through the windshield defroster outlets and some through the heater outlets Air Conditioning If Equipped On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down Then keep your windows closed for the air conditioner to work its best For quick cool down on very hot days use MAX A C with the temp
323. ured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement NOTICE The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index for more information Used Replacement Wheels Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You can t know how it s been used or how far it s been driven It could fail suddenly and cause an accident If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 6 53 Tire Chains NOTICE If your vehicle has P235 75R15 P235 70R15 P235 55R16 or 31x10 50RI5LT C size tires don t use tire chains They can damage your vehicle because there s not enough clearance Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it s contacting your vehicle and don t spin your wheels NOTICE Continued 6 54 NOTICE Continued If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires If you have other size tires use tire chains only where legal and only when you must Use only SAE Class S
324. use undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment At times you may notice a decrease in range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again Check to determine if battery replacement or resynchronization is necessary See the instructions that follow If you re still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service Operation UNLOCK When you press UNLOCK the driver s door will unlock automatically the parking lamps will flash and the interior lights will go on If you press UNLOCK again within three seconds the remaining doors will unlock the parking lamps will flash and the interior lights will go on LOCK
325. ust use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher when towing Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight The weight of the trailer tongue also affects trailering capacity See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at the address listed in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 4 49 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle And if you will tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity 4 50 If you re using a weight carrying hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 10 per
326. vehicle has one Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt can t properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time 1 56 Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash 1 57 Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt isn t long enough to fasten your dealer will order you an extender It s free When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you The extender will be just for you and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose Don t let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your b
327. ver occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 19 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote For Two Wheel Drive vehicles only Clean and repack the front wheel bearings or at each brake relining whichever occurs first Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service 4 3L V6 Engine Only Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote 7 20 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City
328. view these sections before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight 4 55 Section 5 Problems on the Road ee Here you ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road 5 2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5 17 Engine Fan Noise 5 2 Other Warning Devices 5 17 If a Tire Goes Flat 5 3 Jump Starting 5 18 Changing a Flat Tire 5 7 Towing Your Vehicle 5 29 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 5 8 Engine Overheating 5 30 If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow 5 10 Cooling System 5 1 Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off Press the button on top of the steering column all the way down to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key isn t in To turn off the flashers press the button until the first click and release When the hazard warning flashers are on your turn signals won t work The flashers will stop if you step on the brake Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Jump Starting If your battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle
329. visor will send a command to your vehicle to unlock itself The advisor can delay unlocking your vehicle Remote Door Unlock is disabled 48 hours after the vehicle is parked to maintain the battery charge Vehicle Locator Service To contact the center call 1 888 4 ONSTAR You will be required to provide your security information An advisor will send a command to your vehicle to sound the horn and or flash the lamps In order to provide you with excellent service calls with the OnStar Center may be monitored or recorded 2 63 Premium Services Includes Safety and Security Services Route Support An advisor can provide directions or guidance to anywhere you want to go In addition they can help you locate gas stations rest areas ATMs hospitals hotels stores eateries and more Concierge Services The concierge advisor can obtain tickets reservations or help with vacation trip planning and other unique items and services Ride Assist An advisor can locate transportation in the event that you are unable to drive OnStar System Limitations Complete limitations can be found on the Subscriber Services Agreement OnStar Service is available in the 48 contiguous United States Alaska Hawaii and Canada available when the vehicle is within the operating range of a cellular provider 2 64 subject to limitations caused by atmospheric conditions such as severe weather or topographical condit
330. wn in frontal or near frontal impacts The air bag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain As always wear your safety belt See Off Road Driving in the Index for more tips on off road driving What makes an air bag inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the air bag The inflator air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger How does an air bag restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those air bags Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions What will you see after an air bag inflates A
331. x For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an air bag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow connectors They are probably part of the air bag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The air bag system does not need regular maintenance 1 29 Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Q A iS If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the front of my vehicle will it keep the air bags from working properly As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle s basic structure isn t changed it s not likely to keep the air bags from working properly in a crash Is there anything I might add to the front of the vehicle that could keep the air bags from working properly Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system front end sheet metal or height they may keep the air bag system from working properly Also the air bag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag sensors If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Sa
332. y require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you re driving don t wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who doesn t lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the inability to se
333. years of listening pleasure You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first Find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all its controls to be sure you re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it Setting the Clock for Systems with SET Button Press SET Within five seconds press and hold the SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on the display Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until the correct hour appears on the display Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and MN Buttons Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the display Press and hold MN until the correct minute appears on the display To display the clock with the ignition off press RECALL or HR MN and the time will be displayed for a few seconds There is an initial two second delay before the clock goes into the time set mode AM FM Stereo oa EL ia Sie Ne el el ee i i E e e o e m i I E i aad Playing the Radio VOLUME This knob turns the system on and off and controls the volume To increase volume and turn the radio on turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume and turn the radio off RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing the recall knob When the radio is playing press this knob to recall the station frequency Finding a Station AM FM Press the lower knob to switch betwee
334. you do for the radio The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the display whenever a tape is being played Anytime a tape is inserted the top side is selected for play first The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal or CrO9 and adjusts for best playback sound PREV 1 Press the PREV button or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previous selection A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation PROG 2 Press this button to switch from one side of the tape to the other 3 14 NEXT 3 Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation The sound will mute while searching for the next selection REV 4 Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV again The radio will play the last selected station while reversing the tape The tape direction arrow will blink during the reverse operation DO 5 Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise The double D symbol will appear on the display while the player is in this mode Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby a
335. your VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your engine specifications and replacement parts Service Parts Identification Label You ll find this label on the inside of the glove box It s very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this label is your VIN the model designation paint information and e a list of all production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle 6 63 Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment NOTICE Don t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index Headlamps The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit breaker An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off or in some cases to remain off If this happens have your headlamp wiring checked right away 6 64 Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical proble

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

入 札 公 告 - 大分工業高等専門学校  central mc101  manual 562 cosmos.cdr  Guia Prático de Formalização Bradesco  今すぐ印刷！  NEC PlasmaSync 50XM4 User's Manual  Suite - Liste Typographie  INSTALLATION MANUAL GT7000  dearborn protocol adapter family user`s manual  CYVMD9000U - Support  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file